You are on page 1of 782

SINAMICS G120

Control Units CU240B-2 Control Units CU240E-2 List Manual 01/2012

SINAMICS
s

s
Parameters

1 2 3 A B C

SINAMICS

Function diagrams Faults and alarms

SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units


List Manual

Appendix List of abbreviations Index

Valid for Control units CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN CU240E-2_PN_F

Firmware version 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

A5E02631767B AD

01/2012

Safety Notices
This manual contains information that you should observe to ensure your own personal safety and prevent material damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle; notices that relate to material damage only have no warning triangle. The notices shown below are graded according to the level of hazard (from most to least hazardous):

Danger
Indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
Indicates that death or serious injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
With a warning triangle, indicates that minor injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
Without a warning triangle, indicates that material damage may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
Indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the corresponding instructions are not observed. If more than one level of danger is simultaneously applicable, the warning notice for the highest level is used. A warning notice with a warning triangle indicating possible personal injury may also include a warning relating to material damage.

Qualified Personnel
The associated device/system may only be installed and operated in conjunction with this documentation. The device/system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of the safety notices in this documentation, "qualified personnel" are those authorized to commission, ground, and label equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.

Proper Use of Siemens Products


Note the following:

Warning
Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications specified in the catalog and in the associated technical documentation. If third-party products and components are to be used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. To ensure proper and safe operation of these products, they must be correctly transported, stored, set up, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated, and maintained. The permissible ambient conditions must be met. Information in the associated documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified with are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any other names used in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Copyright Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved The reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written permission. Failure to observe this rule will lead to damage claims. All rights reserved, especially those relating to granting patents or GM registration. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 4848 90327 NUREMBERG GERMANY

Liability Disclaimer We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, we cannot assume responsibility for any deviations that may arise. The data in this document is regularly checked and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG 2012 Subject to change without prior notice.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11)

Table of contents
1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.6 2 Introduction to the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of the parameter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command and drive data sets - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power unit data sets (PDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder data sets (EDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BICO parameters (connectors/binectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binector inputs (BI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector inputs (CI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binector outputs (BO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector outputs (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector/binector outputs (CO/BO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for write protection and know-how protection . . . . . . . . . . Parameters with "WRITE_NO_LOCK" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters with "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters with "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 1-8 1-8 1-15 1-18 1-468 1-468 1-471 1-476 1-478 1-478 1-479 1-479 1-482 1-484 1-486 1-490 1-492 1-492 1-492 1-493 1-494 2-497 2-498 2-503 2-508 2-516 2-527 2-534 2-548 2-566 2-568 2-583 2-593 2-597 2-617

Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 Table of contents, function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication, fieldbus interface (USS, Modbus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROFIdrive communication (PROFIBUS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Contents-5

Table of contents

2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 3

Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-638 2-640 2-645 2-655 2-660 3-663 3-664 3-664 3-666 3-667 3-668 A-763 A-764 A-764 B-765 C-771

Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2 Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acknowledgement of faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 ASCII table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B C

List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-6

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters
Contents 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Introduction to the parameters Parameter list Command and drive data sets - overview BICO parameters (connectors/binectors) Parameters for write protection and know-how protection Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)

1
1-8 1-18 1-479 1-489 1-500 1-502

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-7

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

1.1
1.1.1

Introduction to the parameters


Explanation of the parameter list
The layout of the parameter description is as follows (principle):
Index BICO (if available)

r0068[0...1]

CO: Absolute current actual value / i_act absolute value


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Unit group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Fig. 1-1

Read parameter

Index

BICO (if available)

p0700[0...n]
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Command source selection / Cmd src sel


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Unit group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 184 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

CU/PM variants

Fig. 1-2

Write parameter

Parameter number Indicates the respective parameter number. The numbers used have four to five digits. Numbers prefixed with an "r" indicate that the parameter is "write-protected" and displays a specific value, but cannot be changed directly by specifying a different value via this parameter number. All other parameters begin with a "p". The values of these parameters can be changed directly in the range indicated by the "Min" and "Max" settings in the header. If these values have a physical unit, this is shown in the square brackets. [Index] indicates that the parameter is indexed, and which indices are available. .0...15 indicates that the parameter has several bits that can be evaluated or connected individually. CU/PM variants Indicates for which Control Units (CU) and/or Power Modules (PM) the parameter is valid. If no CU or PM is listed, then the parameter is valid for all variants.

1-8

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Parameter text (long name / short name) Specifies the name of the respective parameter. Certain parameter names contain the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI, CO and BO/CO followed by a colon. These abbreviations have the following meanings:
BI =
P9999 (0)

Binector input, i.e. the parameter selects the source of a binary signal Binector output, i.e. the parameter connects as a binary signal

BO

r9999

CI

r9999 (999:9)

Connector input, i.e. the parameter selects the source of an analog signal Connector output, i.e. the parameter connects as an analog signal Connector/binector output, i.e. the parameter connects as an analog signal and/or as a binary signal

CO

r9999 [99]

CO/BO =

r9999 r9999
CoBo.pdf

To be able to use BICO, you require access to the entire parameter list. At this level many new parameter settings are possible, including the BICO functionality. BICO functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and output functions. The BICO System enables complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and mathematical relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial, etc.) and outputs (converter current, frequency, analog output, relay, etc.). With BI and CI parameters, the parameter number is specified at Factory setting with which the parameter is connected. In this case, the Min and Max values only have dashes. Access level Indicates the level of user access. Only a freely accessible access level is effective for the parameters of all CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units. This covers the parameters using the "Access level 1" to "Access level 3". The parameters of the "Access level 4" are service parameters and password-protected.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-9

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Data type The available data types are listed in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Character Unsigned8 (U8) Unsigned16 (U16) Unsigned32 (U32) Integer16 (I16) Integer32 (I32) Floating Point (Float) Available data types Meaning 8-bit without sign 16-bit without sign 32-bit without sign 16-bit integer 32-bit integer Floating-point number

The information on the data type for binector and connector inputs can consist of two specifications (separated by a slash): First specification: Data type of the parameter Second specifica- Data type of the signal source preferably be intercontion: nected (binector or connector outputs) Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO output parameter (signal source), the following combinations are possible when creating BICO interconnections:
Table 1-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections BICO input parameter CI parameter BICO output parameter CO: Unsigned8 CO: Unsigned16 CO: Unsigned32 CO: Integer16 CO: Integer32 CO: FloatingPoint32 BO: Unsigned8 BO: Unsigned16 BO: Unsigned32 BO: Integer16 BO: Integer32 BO: FloatingPoint32 Legend: Unsigned32/ Integer16 x x x x x x Unsigned32/ Integer32 x x x x x x Unsigned32/ FloatingPoint32 r2050 x x x x x x BI parameter Unsigned32/ Binary

x: BICO interconnection permitted : BICO interconnection not permitted

1-10

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Scaling Specification of the reference variable with which a signal value is automatically converted for a BICO interconnection. Reference values, corresponding to 100%, are required for the display of physical units as percentages. These reference values are entered in parameters p2000 ... p2006.
Percent
Reference quantity p2000...r2006 x1

Physical unit
y x1 x2 100 %

Physical unit
x1 x2 Reference quantity p2000...r2006

Percent

%
x1 100 %
x2

x2

[%]

In addition to p2000 ... p2006, the following scaling is used: PERCENT 4000H Calculated Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations. p0340 determines which calculations are to be performed: p0340 = 1 includes the calculations from p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5. p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360, p0625). p0340 = 3 includes the calculations from p0340 = 4, 5. p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters. p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits. Note: For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is also called automatically. After p1900 = 1, 2, p0340 = 3 is also called automatically. Parameters with a reference to p0340 after "Calculated", depend on the Power Module being used and the motor. In this case, the values at "Factory setting" do not correspond to the actual values because these values are calculated during the commissioning. This also applies to the motor parameters. 1.0 = 100% 4000 hex = 100%

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-11

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Can be changed Converter state in which a parameter can be changed. Three states are possible: Commissioning Operation Ready for operation C(x) U T

The parameter can be changed in these states. One, two or all states can be specified. If all three states are specified, the parameter setting can be changed in all three converter states. (x) indicates that the parameter can only be changed when p0010 = x. Data set Parameters that belong to data sets are identified as follows: CDS (Command Data Set) They are always indexed with [0 ... n] (with n = 0 ... 3 depending on the setting in p0170). [0] = command data set 0 [1] = command data set 1 etc. DDS (Drive Data Set) They are always indexed with [0 ... n] (with n = 0 ... 3 depending on the setting in p0180). [0] = drive data set 0 [1] = drive data set 1 etc. MDS (Motor Data Set) and PDS (Power Unit Data Set) They are always indexed with [0 ... n] (with n = 0 ... 3 depending on the setting in p0180). The motor data sets and power unit data sets are assigned to the drive data sets, i.e. they are automatically selected with the selection of a drive data set (e.g. drive data set 1 contains motor data set 1 and power unit data set 1). Data sets can only created and deleted when p0010 = 15 is set.

1-12

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Unit group and unit selection For parameters where the unit can be switched, the specifications for "Unit group" and "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with which parameter the unit can be switched over. The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square brackets after the values for "Min", "Max", and "Factory setting". Min Specifies the lowest value to which the parameter can be set. Max Specifies the highest value to which the parameter can be set. Factory setting Specifies the default value, i.e. the value that is valid when the user does not specify a value for the parameter (see also "Calculated"). Example: Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505 The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be switched over using p0505. All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below.
Table 1-3 Unit group (p0100) Unit selection for p0100 = 0 7_4 14_6 25_1 27_1 28_1 Nm kW kgm2 kg Nm/A lbf ft HP lb ft2 lb lbf ft/A 1 Nm kW kgm2 kg Nm/A 2 Reference variable for %

Unit group

Table 1-4

Unit group (p0505) Unit selection for p0505 = 1 2 % % % % % % % Hz rpm Vrms V V Arms A 3 % % % % % % % 4 p2000 p2000 p2001 p2001 p2001 p2002 p2002 Reference variable for %

Unit group

2_1 3_1 5_1 5_2 5_3 6_2 6_5

Hz rpm Vrms V V Arms A

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-13

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Table 1-4

Unit group (p0505), continued Unit selection for p0505 = 1 2 % Nm % kW C K % 3 lbf ft lbf ft HP HP F F 1/s2 % lbf ft % HP F F % 4 p2003 r2004 p2007 Reference variable for %

Unit group

7_1 7_2 14_5 14_10 21_1 21_2 39_1 Table 1-5

Nm Nm kW kW C K 1/s2

Unit group (p0595) Unit selection for p0595 = Value Unit Reference variable for %

Unit group

9_1

The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in p0595 (See Section 1.2).

Description Explanation of the function of a parameter Values List of the possible values of a parameter. Recommendation Information about recommended settings. Index The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parameters, except for parameters that belong to a data set (see "Data set"). Bit array For parameters with bit arrays, the following information is provided about each bit: Bit number and signal name Meaning with signal states 0 and 1 Function diagram (FP) (optional). The signal is shown on this function diagram. Dependency Conditions that must be fulfilled in conjunction with this parameter. Also includes special effects that can occur between this parameter and others.

1-14

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

1.1.2

Number ranges of parameters


Note: The following number ranges represent an overview for all of the parameters available for the SINAMICS drive family. The parameters for the product described in this List Manual are described in detail in Section 1.2. Parameters are grouped into the following number ranges:
Table 1-6 Number ranges for SINAMICS Description To 0099 0199 0299 0399 0499 0599 0699 0799 0839 0879 0899 0999 1199 1299 1399 1799 1899 1999 2009 2099 2139 2199 2359 2399 Display and operation Commissioning Power unit Motor Encoder Technology and units, motor-specific data, probes Thermal monitoring, maximum current, operating hours, motor data, central probe Control Unit terminals, measuring sockets CDS, DDS data sets, motor changeover Sequence control (e.g. signal source for ON/OFF1) ESR, parking, control and status words PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive Setpoint channel (e.g. ramp-function generator) Functions (e.g. motor holding brake) V/f control Control Gating unit Power unit and motor identification Reference values Communication (fieldbus) Faults and alarms Signals and monitoring Technology controller Staging, hibernation

Range From 0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0840 0880 0900 1000 1200 1300 1400 1800 1900 2000 2010 2100 2140 2200 2360

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-15

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Table 1-6

Number ranges for SINAMICS, continued Description To 2699 2719 2729 2819 2930 3099 3109 3199 3299 3659 3699 3779 3819 3849 3899 3999 4599 4699 4799 4849 4999 5169 5499 5599 5613 6999 7499 7599 7729 7789 7839 8399 8449 8599 Position control (LR) and basic positioning (EPOS) Reference values, display Load gear Logic operations Fixed values (e.g. per cent, torque) Motor identification results Real time clock (RTC) Faults and alarms Signals and monitoring Infeed control Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), Braking Module internal Advanced Positioning Control (APC) Synchronization Friction characteristic Functions (e.g. long stator) Management Terminal Board, Terminal Module (e.g. TB30, TM31) Sensor Module Trace Function generator OA application Spindle diagnostics Line droop control (e.g. shaft generator) Dynamic grid support (solar) PROFIenergy SINAMICS GM/SM/GL/SL Parallel connection of power units SINAMICS SM120 External signals NVRAM, system parameters EEPROM read/write parameters Internal system parameters Real time clock (RTC) Data and macro management

Range From 2500 2700 2720 2800 2900 3000 3100 3110 3200 3400 3660 3700 3780 3820 3850 3900 4000 4600 4700 4800 4950 5000 5400 5500 5600 5900 7000 7500 7700 7770 7800 7840 8400 8500

1-16

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Introduction to the parameters

Table 1-6

Number ranges for SINAMICS, continued Description To 8799 8899 8999 9299 9399 9499 9899 9949 9999 10199 11299 20999 25999 53999 61001 CAN bus Communication Board Ethernet (CBE), PROFIdrive Industrial Ethernet, PROFINET, CBE20 Topology Safety Integrated Parameter consistency and storage Safety Integrated Topology Diagnostics, internal Safety Integrated Free technology controller 0, 1, 2 Free function blocks (FBLOCKS) Drive Control Chart (DCC) SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC control) PROFINET

Range From 8600 8800 8900 9000 9300 9400 9500 9900 9950 10000 11000 20000 21000 50000 61000

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-17

Parameters Parameter list

1.2

Parameter list
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4502400, Language: eng Objects: CU240B-2, CU240B-2_DP, CU240E-2, CU240E-2_DP, CU240E-2_DP_F, CU240E-2_F, CU240E-2_PN_F, CU240E-2 PN

r0002

Drive operating display / Drv op_display


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200 Operation - everything enabled Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142) Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141) Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140) Operation - MotID, excit. running Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1" Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2 Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge Operation - DC braking active (p1230, p1231) Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852) Ready for operation - de-magnetizing running (p0347) Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840) Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010) Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840) Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845) Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849) Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0010) Initialization Wait for booting/partial booting Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Operating display for the drive. 0: 10: 12: 13: 14: 16: 17: 18: 19: 21: 22: 31: 35: 41: 42: 43: 45: 46: 70: 200:

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: r0046 For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. OC: Operating condition RFG: Ramp-function generator COMM: Commissioning MotID: Motor data identification

p0003

Access level / Acc_level


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C, U, T Units group: Min 3 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 Expert Service Factory setting 3 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Note:

Sets the access level to read and write parameters. 3: 4:

Access level 3 (experts): Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization). Access level 4 (service): For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).

1-18

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0010
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 49 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive. Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. 0: 1: 2: 3: 5: 15: 29: 30: 39: 49: Ready Quick commissioning Power unit commissioning Motor commissioning Technological application/units Data sets Only Siemens int Parameter reset Only Siemens int Only Siemens int

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: r3996 When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur. The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter must be set to 0. By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically reset to 0. Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0. p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 = 15). p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

p0010
PM230 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description: Value:

Max 49

Factory setting 1

Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive. Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. 0: 1: 2: 3: 5: 15: 29: 30: 39: 49: Ready Quick commissioning Power unit commissioning Motor commissioning Technological application/units Data sets Only Siemens int Parameter reset Only Siemens int Only Siemens int

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: r3996 When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-19

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter must be set to 0. By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically reset to 0. Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0. p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 = 15). p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

p0010
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description: Value:

Max 95

Factory setting 1

Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive. Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. 0: 1: 2: 3: 5: 15: 29: 30: 39: 49: 95: Ready Quick commissioning Power unit commissioning Motor commissioning Technological application/units Data sets Only Siemens int Parameter reset Only Siemens int Only Siemens int Safety Integrated commissioning

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: r3996 When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur. The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter must be set to 0. By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically reset to 0. Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1. Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0. p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 = 15). p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

1-20

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0014

Buffer memory mode / Buf mem mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Save in a non-volatile fashion (RAM) Buffer memory active (non-volatile) Clear buffer memory Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the mode for the buffer memory. 0: 1: 2:

Dependency:

If p0014 = 1, changes in the same parameter, as well as in following parameters will not be copied to the buffer memory: Refer to: p0040, p0340, p0650, p0802, p0803, p0804, p0952, p0969, p0970, p0971, p0972, p1900, p1910, p1960, p2111, p3900, p3981 Refer to: A01066, A01067

Caution: Notice: Note:

For p0014 = 2, entries in the buffer memory are lost and cannot be retrieved. After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. Re p0014 = 0: Parameter changes are saved in the volatile memory (RAM). Non-volatile storage from RAM to ROM is carried out in the following cases: - p0971 = 1 - change from p0014 = 0 to 1 Re p0014 = 1: With this setting, alarm A01066 followed by alarm A01067 can occur if parameters are continually changed via a fieldbus system. Parameter changes are entered in the volatile memory (RAM) and also in the non-volatile buffer memory. In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is cleared: - p0971 = 1 - power down/power up the Control Unit - change from p0014 = 1 to 0 Re p0014 = 2: The procedure to clear the entries in the buffer memory is initiated. p0014 is automatically set to 0 after the entries have been cleared.

p0015
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C, C(1) Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min 0 Description: Caution: Notice: Note: Runs the corresponding macro files.

Max 999999

Factory setting 7

When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-21

Parameters Parameter list

p0015
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C, C(1) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999 Factory setting 12 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Caution: Notice: Note:

Runs the corresponding macro files. When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

r0018

Control Unit firmware version / CU FW version


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4294967295 Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit. Refer to: r0197, r0198 Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

r0020

Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator). Refer to: r0060 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

r0021

CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed. For U/f control and when slip compensation is deactivated (see p1335), the synchronous speed to the output frequency is shown in r0021.

Dependency:

Refer to: r0022, r0063

1-22

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063). For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if slip compensation is deactivated.

r0022

Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_act rpm smooth


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed. r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over. For U/f control and when slip compensation is deactivated (see p1335), the synchronous speed to the output frequency is shown in r0022.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0021, r0063 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063). For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if slip compensation is deactivated.

r0024

Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the smoothed converter frequency. Refer to: r0066 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).

r0025

CO: Output voltage smoothed / U_outp smooth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit. Refer to: r0072 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-23

Parameters Parameter list

r0026

CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage. Refer to: r0070 When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM240) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display parameter. Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070). r0026 sets itself to the lower value of the pulsating DC link voltage.

Note:

r0027

CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value. Refer to: r0068 This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).

r0028

Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth. Refer to: r0074 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

r0029

Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current. Refer to: r0076

1-24

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0030

Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current. Refer to: r0078 Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030) and unsmoothed (r0078).

r0031

Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the smoothed torque actual value. Refer to: r0080 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).

r0032

CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 14_10 Min - [kW] Calculated: Scaling: r2004 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power. Refer to: r0082 This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed value should be used. Power delivered at the motor shaft. The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).

r0033

Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage. The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using p2196.

Dependency:

This parameter is only available for vector control. For U/f control r0033 = 0 %.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-25

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081). For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies: - Required torque = M_set total - Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538) For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies: - Required torque = - M_set total - Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539) For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 % For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %

r0034

CO: Motor utilization / Motor utilization


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the motor utilization from motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3. The motor utilization is only determined for permanent-magnet synchronous motors when the motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3 is activated. For motor temperature model 1 (I2t) (p0612.0 = 1), the following applies: - r0034 = (motor model temperature - 40 K) / (p0605 - 40 K) * 100 % For motor temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1), the following applies: - r0034 = (motor model temperature - p0613) / (p5390 - p0613) * 100 % Refer to: p0611, p0612, p0615

Notice: Note:

After the drive is switched on, the system starts to determine the motor temperature with an assumed model value. This means that the value for the motor utilization is only valid after a stabilization time. Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. For r0034 = -200.0 %, the following applies: The value is invalid (e.g. the motor temperature model is not activated or has been incorrectly parameterized).

r0035

CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 21_1 Min - [C] Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the actual temperature in the motor. For r0035 not equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - this temperature display is valid. - a KTY sensor is connected. - for induction motors, the thermal motor model is activated (p0601 = 0). For r0035 equal to -200.0 C, the following applies: - this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error). - A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected. - for synchronous motors, the thermal motor model is activated (p0601 = 0).

1-26

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0036

CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation. A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.). If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed. In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.

Dependency:

Refer to: p0290, p0294 Refer to: F30005

r0037[0...19]

CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 21_1 Min - [C] Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the temperatures in the power unit. [0] = Inverter, maximum value [1] = Depletion layer maximum value [2] = Rectifier maximum value [3] = Air intake [4] = Interior of power unit [5] = Inverter 1 [6] = Inverter 2 [7...10] = Reserved [11] = Rectifier 1 [12] = Reserved [13] = Depletion layer 1 [14] = Depletion layer 2 [15] = Depletion layer 3 [16] = Depletion layer 4 [17] = Depletion layer 5 [18] = Depletion layer 6 [19] = Reserved The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal. r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]). r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]). r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]). The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier. r0037[2,3,6,11,14...18] is only relevant for chassis power units.

Note:

r0038

Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed actual power factor. This refers to the electrical power of the basic fundamental signals at the converter output terminals.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-27

Parameters Parameter list

Notice: Note:

For infeed units, the following applies: For active powers < 25 % of the rated power, this does not provide any useful information. Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.

r0039[0...2]

Energy display / Energy displ


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [kWh] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [kWh] Factory setting - [kWh] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit. [0] = Energy balance (sum) [1] = Energy drawn [2] = Energy fed back Refer to: p0040 Re index 0: Sum of the energy drawn and energy that is fed back.

Dependency: Note:

p0040

Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Setting to reset the display in r0039 and r0041. Procedure: Set p0040 = 0 --> 1 The displays are reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.

Dependency:

Refer to: r0039

r0041

Energy consumption saved / Energy cons saved


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [kWh] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [kWh] Factory setting - [kWh] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the saved energy referred to 100 operating hours. Refer to: p0040 This display is used for a fluid-flow machine. The flow characteristic is entered into p3320 ... p3329. For an operating time of below 100 hours, the display is interpolated up to 100 hours.

p0045

Display values smoothing time constant / Disp_val T_smooth


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 4.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values: r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].

1-28

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0046.0...31

CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig


Access level: 1 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name OFF1 enable missing OFF2 enable missing OFF3 enable missing Operation enable missing DC braking enable missing Ramp-function generator enable missing Ramp-function generator start missing Setpoint enable missing OFF1 enable internal missing OFF2 enable internal missing OFF3 enable internal missing Pulse enable internal missing DC braking internal enable missing PU enab. missing Drive inactive or not operational De-magnetizing not completed Brake open missing Speed controller inhibited Jog setpoint active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 10 11 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 26 27 28 30 31

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0002 The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present. Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal. - there is a "switching on inhibited". Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal. Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal. Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal. Bit 04 =1 (DC brake active) when: - the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal. Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because: - the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal. - the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056) have a 1 signal. Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal. Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0. Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - commissioning mode is selected (p0010 > 0). - there is an OFF2 fault response. - the drive is not operational.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-29

Parameters Parameter list

Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present. Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if: - sequence control does not have a finished message. Bit 20 = 1 (internal DC brake active), if: - the drive is not in the state "Operation" or in "OFF1/3". - the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0). Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the power unit does not issue an enable signal (e.g. because DC link voltage is too low). - the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired. - hibernation is active. Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the drive is not operational. Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - de-magnetization not completed. Bit 28 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened. Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present: - the pole position identification is active. - motor data identification is active (only certain steps). Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.

r0047

Motor data identification and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
Access level: 1 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300 Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (stationary measurement) and the speed/velocity controller optimization (rotating measurement). 0: 115: 120: 140: 150: 170: 195: 200: 220: 230: 240: 250: 270: 290: 300: No measurement Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2) Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Calculate speed controller setting Measurement, moment of inertia Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1) Rotating measurement selected identification, leakage inductance Identification, rotor time constant Identification, stator inductance Identification, stator inductance LQLD Identification, stator resistance Identification, valve lockout time Stationary measurement selected

Note:

Re r0047 = 300: This value is also displayed if encoder calibration p1990 is selected.

1-30

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0050.0...1

CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name CDS eff., bit 0 CDS eff., bit 1 1 signal ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS). Bit 00 01

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836 The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.

r0051.0...1

CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DDS eff., bit 0 DDS eff., bit 1 1 signal ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS). Bit 00 01

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0820, p0821, r0837 When selecting the motor data identification routine and the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.

r0052.0...15

CO/BO: Status word 1 / ZSW 1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Rdy for switch on Ready Operation enabled Fault present Coast down active (OFF2) Quick Stop active (OFF3) Switching on inhibited active Alarm present Deviation, setpoint/actual speed Control request Maximum speed reached I, M, P limit reached Motor holding brake open Alarm motor overtemperature Motor rotates forwards Alarm drive converter overload 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Factory setting 0 signal No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays status word 1. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Caution:

p2080 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-31

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The following status bits are displayed in r0052. Bit 00: r0899 Bit 0 Bit 01: r0899 Bit 1 Bit 02: r0899 Bit 2 Bit 03: r2139 Bit 3 (or r1214 Bit 10, if p1210 > 0) Bit 04: r0899 Bit 4 Bit 05: r0899 Bit 5 Bit 06: r0899 Bit 6 Bit 07: r2139 Bit 7 Bit 08: r2197 Bit 7 Bit 09: r0899 Bit 7 Bit 10: r2197 Bit 6 Bit 11: r0056 Bit 13 (negated) Bit 12: r0899 Bit 12 Bit 13: r2135 Bit 14 (negated) Bit 14: r2197 Bit 3 Bit 15: r2135 Bit 15 (negated)

r0053.0...11

CO/BO: Status word 2 / ZSW 2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DC braking active |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) I_act >= p2170 |n_act| > p2155 |n_act| <= p2155 |n_act| >= r1119 (n_set) Vdc <= p2172 Vdc > p2172 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Technology controller output at the lower limit Technology controller output at the upper limit 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays status word 2. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

Caution: Note:

p2081 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection. The following status bits are displayed in r0053: Bit 00: r1239 Bit 8 Bit 01: r2197 Bit 5 (negated) Bit 02: r2197 Bit 0 (negated) Bit 03: r2197 Bit 8 Bit 04: r2197 Bit 2 Bit 05: r2197 Bit 1 Bit 06: r2197 Bit 4 Bit 07: r2197 Bit 9 Bit 08: r2197 Bit 10 Bit 09: r1199 Bit 2 (negated) Bit 10: r2349 Bit 10 Bit 11: r2349 Bit 11

1-32

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0054.0...15

CO/BO: Control word 1 / STW 1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 OC / OFF3 Operation enable Ramp-function generator enable Continue ramp-function generator Speed setpoint enable Acknowledge fault Jog bit 0 Jog bit 1 Master ctrl by PLC Direction reversal (setpoint) Motorized potentiometer raise Motorized potentiometer lower CDS bit 0 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP 3030 3030 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays control word 1. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 14 15

Note:

The following control bits are displayed in r0054: Bit 00: r0898 Bit 0 Bit 01: r0898 Bit 1 Bit 02: r0898 Bit 2 Bit 03: r0898 Bit 3 Bit 04: r0898 Bit 4 Bit 05: r0898 Bit 5 Bit 06: r0898 Bit 6 Bit 07: r2138 Bit 7 Bit 08: r0898 Bit 8 Bit 09: r0898 Bit 9 Bit 10: r0898 Bit 10 Bit 11: r1198 Bit 11 Bit 13: r1198 Bit 13 Bit 14: r1198 Bit 14 Bit 15: r0836 Bit 0 Re bit 10: If p0700 = 2 is set, bit 10 always shows "1".

r0055.0...15

CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Fixed setp bit 0 Fixed setp bit 1 Fixed setp bit 2 Fixed setp bit 3 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays supplementary control word. Bit 00 01 02 03

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-33

Parameters Parameter list

04 05 08 09 11 12 13 15 Note:

DDS select. bit 0 DDS select. bit 1 Technology controller enable DC braking enable Droop enable Torque control active External fault 1 (F07860) CDS bit 1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

No No No No No No Yes No

The following control bits are displayed in r0055: Bit 00: r1198 Bit 0 Bit 01: r1198 Bit 1 Bit 02: r1198 Bit 2 Bit 03: r1198 Bit 3 Bit 04: r0837 Bit 0 Bit 05: r0837 Bit 1 Bit 08: r2349 Bit 0 (negated) Bit 09: r1239 Bit 11 Bit 11: r1406 Bit 11 Bit 12: r1406 Bit 12 Bit 13: r2138 Bit 13 (negated) Bit 15: r0836 Bit 1

r0056.0...15
PM230 PM240

CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Initialization completed De-magnetizing completed Pulse enable present Soft starting present Magnetizing completed Voltage boost when starting Acceleration voltage Frequency negative Field weakening active Voltage limit active Slip limit active Frequency limit active Current limiting controller voltage output active Current/torque limiting Vdc_max controller active Vdc_min controller active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Active Active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Active Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No Inactive Inactive No No No No No No Inactive No No FP 6300 6300 6714 6310 6060 6220, 6320 6220, 6320 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word of the closed-loop control. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

1-34

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0056.0...13
PM250 PM260

CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Initialization completed De-magnetizing completed Pulse enable present Soft starting present Magnetizing completed Voltage boost when starting Acceleration voltage Frequency negative Field weakening active Voltage limit active Slip limit active Frequency limit active Current limiting controller voltage output active Current/torque limiting 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Active Active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Active Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No Inactive Inactive No No No No No No Inactive FP 6300 6300 6714 6310 6060 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word of the closed-loop control. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13

r0060

CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator). Refer to: r0020 The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

r0062

CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.

r0063[0...2]

CO: Speed actual value / n_act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual speed of the closed-loop speed control and the U/f control. For U/f control and when slip compensation is deactivated (see p1335), the synchronous speed to the output frequency is shown in r0063[0].

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-35

Parameters Parameter list

Index:

[0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 [2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip Refer to: r0021, r0022 The speed actual value r0063[0] is additionally displayed - smoothed with p0045 - in r0063[1]. The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state.

Dependency: Note:

r0064

CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.

r0065

Slip frequency / f_Slip


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 2_1 Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).

r0066

CO: Output frequency / f_outp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 2_1 Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the output frequency of the power unit. Refer to: r0024 The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).

r0067

CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the maximum output current of the power unit. The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal protection. Refer to: p0290, p0640

r0068[0...1]

CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays actual absolute current.

1-36

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Index: Dependency: Notice: Note:

[0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 Refer to: r0027 The value is updated with the current controller sampling time. Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2) The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0068[0]).

r0069[0...6]

CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_5 Min - [A] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [A] Factory setting - [A] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W [3] = Phase U offset [4] = Phase V offset [5] = Phase W offset [6] = Total U, V, W In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed. The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.

Note:

r0070

CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 5_2 Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage. Refer to: r0026 When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM240) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display parameter. The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).

Note:

r0071

Maximum output voltage / U_output max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the maximum output voltage. The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth (p1803). As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link voltage.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-37

Parameters Parameter list

r0072

CO: Output voltage / U_output


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual output voltage of the power unit. Refer to: r0025 The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0073

Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the maximum modulation depth. Refer to: p1803

r0074

CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual modulation depth. Refer to: r0028 For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol. Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol. The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 x r0070) / (sqrt(2) x 100 %). The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

r0075

CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set). This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.

r0076

CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act). Refer to: r0029 This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.

1-38

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0077

CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint. This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.

r0078

CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act). Refer to: r0030 This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode. The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).

r0079

CO: Torque setpoint / M_set total


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller.

r0080[0...1]

CO: Torque actual value / M_act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual torque value. [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 Refer to: r0031 The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0080[0]).

r0081

CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the torque utilization as a percentage. The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-39

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

This parameter is only available for vector control. For U/f control r0081 = 0 %. Refer to: r0033 The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081). The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows: - Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 % - Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 %

r0082[0...2]

CO: Active power actual value / P_act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 14_5 Min - [kW] Calculated: Scaling: r2004 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the instantaneous active power. [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 [2] = Electric power Refer to: r0032 The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]).

Dependency: Note:

r0083

CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the flux setpoint.

r0084[0...1]

CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the flux actual value. [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed

r0087

CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual active power factor. This value refers to the electrical power of the basic fundamental signals at the output terminals of the converter.

1-40

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0089[0...2]

Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_3 Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the actual phase voltage. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W The values are determined from the transistor power-on duration.

Note:

r0094

CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [] Calculated: Scaling: p2005 Unit selection: Max - [] Factory setting - [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the transformation angle. Refer to: r1778 The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.

p0100

IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power, p0307) are expressed in [kW] or [hp]. Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz. For p0100 = 0, 2, the following applies: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized. For p0100 = 1, the following applies: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.

Value:

0: 1: 2:

IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units) NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units) NEMA motor (60 Hz, SI units)

Dependency:

If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made. The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307, r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1969). Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323, p0335, r0337, p1800

Note:

The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).

p0124[0...n]

CU detection via LED / CU detection LED


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: PDS

Description: Note:

Identification of the Control Unit using an LED. While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Control Unit.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-41

Parameters Parameter list

p0170

Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(15) Units group: Min 2 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 Factory setting 2 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS). Refer to: p0010, r3996 When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur. It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.

p0180

Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(15) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 Factory setting 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS). Refer to: p0010, r3996 When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

r0197

Bootloader vers / Bootloader vers


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the bootloader version. Refer to: r0018, r0198 Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

r0198[0...1]

BIOS/EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version. r0198[0]: BIOS version r0198[1]: EEPROM data version

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0018, r0197 Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

1-42

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0199[0...24]

Drive object name / DO name


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Freely assignable name for a drive object. In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configuration assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows resources.

Note:

The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

r0200[0...n]

Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: PDS

Description: Note:

Displays the unique code number of the power unit. r0200 = 0: No power unit data found

p0201[0...n]

Power unit code number / PU code no


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(2) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: PDS

Description: Note:

Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used. When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201. The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time. The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers are identical (p0010 = 2). When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.

r0203[0...n]

Actual power unit type / PU actual type


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 2 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400 MICROMASTER 440 MICROMASTER 411 MICROMASTER 410 MICROMASTER 436 MICROMASTER 440 PX MICROMASTER 430 SINAMICS S SINAMICS S (value) SINAMICS S (combi) SINAMICS S120M (distributed) PM220 (SINAMICS G120) PM230 (SINAMICS G120) Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: PDS

Description: Value:

Displays the type of power unit found. 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 100: 101: 102: 103: 112: 113:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-43

Parameters Parameter list

114: 115: 116: 118: 120: 130: 133: 150: 151: 200: 250: 260: 300: 350: 400: Note:

PM240 (SINAMICS G120) PM250 (SINAMICS G120 / S120) PM260 (SINAMICS G120) SINAMICS G120 Px PM340 (SINAMICS S120) PM250D (SINAMICS G120D) SINAMICS G120C SINAMICS G PM330 (SINAMICS G120) SINAMICS GM SINAMICS SM SINAMICS MC SINAMICS GL SINAMICS SL SINAMICS DCM

For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.

r0204[0...n]

Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name RFI filter available F3E regenerative feedback into the line supply Internal Braking Module Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported Safety Integrated supported Internal LC output filter 1 signal Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No Yes No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: PDS

Description: Bit field:

Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware. Bit 01 07 08 12 13 14

p0205
PM230

Power unit application / PU application


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 2) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency: Notice: Note:

The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s. 0: 1: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives

Refer to: r3996 The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970). When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur. When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500) and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no influence when calculating the thermal overload. p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.

1-44

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0205
PM240 PM250, PM260

Power unit application / PU application


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 2) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency: Notice: Note:

The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s. 0: 1: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives

Refer to: r3996 The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970). When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur. When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500) and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no influence when calculating the thermal overload. p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.

r0206[0...4]

Rated power unit power / PU P_rated


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 14_6 Min - [kW] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles. [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = Reserved [4] = Reserved IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp Refer to: p0100, p0205

Dependency:

r0207[0...4]

Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles. [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = Reserved [4] = Reserved Refer to: p0205

Dependency:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-45

Parameters Parameter list

r0208

Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU U_rated


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit. r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/-10 % r0208 = 500 : 500 - 600 V +/-10 % r0208 = 690 : 660 - 690 V +/-10 %

r0209[0...4]

Power unit, maximum current / PU I_max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the maximum output current of the power unit. [0] = Catalog [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = Reserved [4] = Reserved Refer to: p0205

Dependency:

p0210

Drive unit line supply voltage / V_connect


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(2), T Units group: Min 1 [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 63000 [V] Factory setting 400 [V] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Warning:

Sets the drive unit supply voltage (rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage). Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0. The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210. In the case of regenerative power units (PM250, PM260), the regenerative power limit for U/f control current limitation control is calculated as a proportion of the supply voltage p0210. Therefore, p0210 should not be set to a value higher than the actual line voltage. If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically de-activated in some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output. Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage: U_rated = 230 V: - p0210 = 200 ... 240 V U_rated = 400 V: - p0210 = 380 ... 480 V U_rated = 500 V: - p0210 = 500 ... 600 V U_rated = 690 V: - p0210 = 660 ... 690 V The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210: Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35

Caution: Note:

1-46

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage: U_rated = 400 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.78 > 360 V U_rated = 500 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.76 U_rated = 690 V: - U_min = p0210 * 0.74 > 450 V

p0219
PM240

Braking power of the braking resistor / Pw_brake


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(1, 2), T Units group: 14_6 Min 0.00 [kW] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max 20000.00 [kW] Factory setting 0.00 [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Braking power of the connected braking resistor. Refer to: p1127, p1240, p1280, p1531 If a braking power is entered into the parameter, then the following calculations are performed: - p1240, p1280 the Vdc,max control is deactivated. - p1531 = - p0219 the power limit when generating is set (limited to - p1530). - The minimum ramp-down time is calculated (p1127) depending on p0341, p0342 and p1082 If the parameter is reset again to zero, then the Vdc,max controller is reactivated and the power limit as well as the ramp-down time are recalculated.

p0230

Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type mot


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 2) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 No filter Motor reactor dv/dt filter Sine-wave filter, Siemens Sine-wave filter, third-party Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the type of the filter at the motor side. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:

Dependency:

The following parameters are influenced using p0230: p0230 = 1: --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance p0230 = 3: --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance --> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance --> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction --> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number --> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter --> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol p0230 = 4: --> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction --> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user must check whether they are permitted. --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance --> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-47

Parameters Parameter list

--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number --> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802 Note: The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter. if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the Motor Module. p0230 = 1: Power units with output reactor are limited to output frequencies of 150 Hz. p0230 = 3: Power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 200 Hz.

r0231[0...1]

Power cable length, maximum / Cable length max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [m] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [m] Factory setting - [m] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Displays the maximum permissible cable lengths between the drive unit and motor. [0] = Unshielded [1] = Shielded The display value is used to provide information for service and maintenance.

p0233

Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(2), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.000 [mH] Factory setting 0.000 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output. This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power unit. Refer to: p0230 When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out. The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.

Note:

p0234

Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(2), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [F] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.000 [F] Factory setting 0.000 [F] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output. This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power unit. Refer to: p0230 The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground). When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the commissioning phase (p0010 = 0). The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.

Note:

1-48

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0238

Internal power unit resistance / PU R internal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).

p0278

DC link voltage undervoltage threshold reduction / Vdc U_under red


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min -80 [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 0 [V] Factory setting 0 [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the absolute value by which the threshold to initiate the undervoltage fault (F30003) is reduced. Refer to: p0210, r0296 Refer to: F30003 When using a Control Supply Module (CSM) for 24 V supply from the DC link, the minimum continuous DC link voltage may not lie below 430 V. DC link voltages in the range 300 ... 430 V are permissible up to a duration of 1 min. For chassis power units, this parameter has no significance. The resulting shutdown threshold can be read in r0296 and is dependent on the selected rated voltage (p0210) and the power unit being used.

Note:

p0287[0...1]

Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting [0] 6.0 [%] [1] 16.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency: Note:

Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring. The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power unit current (r0209). [0] = Threshold at which pre-charging starts [1] = Threshold at which pre-charging stops Refer to: p1901 Refer to: F30021 This parameter is only relevant for chassis power units.

r0289

CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-49

Parameters Parameter list

p0290

Power unit overload response / PU overld response


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 2 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit. The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload: - heat sink temperature (r0037.0) - chip temperature (r0037.1) - power unit overload I2T (r0036) Possible measures to avoid thermal overload: - reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed or torque control) or the output frequency (for U/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller). - reduce the pulse frequency. A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3:

Reduce output current or output frequency No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t) Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)

Dependency:

If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1). If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set. Refer to: r0036, r0037, p0230, r2135 Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805

Caution: Note:

If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter. The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with variable torque such as for pumps and fans). Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed through. For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the responses. When the motor data identification routine is selected, p0290 cannot be changed.

p0292[0...1]

Power unit temperature alarm threshold / PU T_alrm thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [C] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 25 [C] Factory setting [0] 5 [C] [1] 15 [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the alarm threshold for power unit overtemperatures. The value is set as a difference to the tripping (shutdown) temperature. Drive: If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290. Infeed: When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.

Index: Dependency:

[0] = Heat sink temperature [1] = Power semiconductor (chip) temperature Refer to: r0037, p0290 Refer to: A05000

1-50

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0294

Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.0 [%] Factory setting 95.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload. If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290. Refer to: r0036, p0290 Refer to: A07805 The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.

p0295

Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled. - Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively high heat sink temperature). - For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is active. - for a PM230 power unit, sizes D - F the parameter is ineffective.

r0296

DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the power unit is shut down due to a DC link undervoltage condition (F30003). Refer to: p0278 Refer to: F30003

r0297

DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc U_upper_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage. Refer to: F30002

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-51

Parameters Parameter list

p0300[0...n]

Motor type selection / Mot type sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 204 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description:

Selecting the motor type. The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor belonging to a motor list: 1 = Rotating induction motor 2 = Rotating synchronous motor The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the BOP/IOP).

Value:

0: 1: 2: 10: 13: 17: 19: 204:

No motor Induction motor (rotating) Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet) 1LE1 standard induction motor 1LG6 standard induction motor 1LA7 standard induction motor 1LA9 standard induction motor 1LE4 synchronous motor

Dependency: Note:

When selecting a motor type from the 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311. Once the Control Unit has been powered up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the motor type is pre-configured to induction motor (p0300 = 1). If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.

p0301[0...n]

Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS

Description:

The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list. When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned from the internally available parameter lists.

Dependency: Note:

Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300. Refer to: p0300 The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300. When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is selected.

p0304[0...n]

Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0 [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20000 [Vrms] Factory setting 0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution:

Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate). When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.

1-52

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account. Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-assigned to match the power unit.

p0305[0...n]

Rated motor current / Mot I_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution: Notice: Note:

Sets the rated motor current (rating plate). When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned accordingly. When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account. Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-assigned to match the power unit.

p0306[0...n]

Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 50 Factory setting 1 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the number (count) of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set. Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated. The following should be observed in motors connected in parallel: The following rating plate data should only be entered for one motor: - resistances and inductances: p0350 ... p0361 - currents: p0305, p0320, p0323, p0325, p0329 - power ratings: p0307 - masses/moments of inertia: p0341, p0344 All other parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333).

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: r0331, r0370, r0373, r0374, r0376, r0377, r0382 The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)). The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained! The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel. After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0). For synchronous motors connected in parallel with p1300 >= 20, be following applies: - the individual motors must be mechanically coupled with one another and the EMF must be aligned to one another. For induction motors that are connected in parallel, but which are not mechanically coupled with one another, then the following applies: - an individual motor must not be loaded beyond its stall point.

Notice: Note:

If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately preassigned. Only operation with U/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-53

Parameters Parameter list

p0307[0...n]

Rated motor power / Mot P_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: 14_6 Min 0.00 [kW] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max 100000.00 [kW] Factory setting 0.00 [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Sets the rated motor power (rating plate). IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp NEMA drives (p0100 = 2): Unit kW Refer to: p0100

Caution: Note:

When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-assigned to match the power unit.

p0308[0...n]

Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1.000 Factory setting 0.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Caution: Note:

Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate). For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332. This parameter is only available for p0100 = 0, 2. Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-assigned to match the power unit.

p0309[0...n]

Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 99.9 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate). For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332. This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1). Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332 The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.

p0310[0...n]

Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 650.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).

1-54

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency:

The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with p0311), if p0314 = 0. The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz. Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314

Caution: Notice:

When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.

Note:

p0311[0...n]

Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.0 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 210000.0 [rpm] Factory setting 0.0 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate). For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330. It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for U/f control.

Dependency: Caution: Notice:

If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is re-calculated automatically. Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.

Note:

r0313[0...n]

Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations. r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.

Dependency:

For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313. For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated frequency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311). Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314

Note:

For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency is zero.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-55

Parameters Parameter list

p0314[0...n]

Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the motor pole pair number. p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor r0314 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.

Dependency: Notice:

For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313. If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected.

p0316[0...n]

Motor torque constant / Mot kT


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Units group: 28_1 Min 0.00 [Nm/A] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max 400.00 [Nm/A] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm/A] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor. p0316 = 0: The torque constant is calculated from the motor data. p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque constant.

Dependency: Caution: Note:

Refer to: r0334 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).

p0318[0...n]

Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3) Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution: Note:

Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611). This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).

p0320[0...n]

Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5000.000 [Arms] Factory setting 0.000 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Induction motors: Sets the rated motor magnetizing current. For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.

1-56

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Synchronous motors: Sets the rated motor short-circuit current. Caution: Note: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The magnetizing current p0320 for induction motors is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0. If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.

p0322[0...n]

Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.0 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 210000.0 [rpm] Factory setting 0.0 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Caution: Notice:

Sets the maximum motor speed. Refer to: p1082 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.

p0323[0...n]

Maximum motor current / Mot I_max


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3) Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution: Notice: Note:

Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. de-magnetizing current for synchronous motors). When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned accordingly. The parameter has no effect for induction motors. The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is entered into p0640.

p0325[0...n]

Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.000 [Arms] Factory setting 0.000 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine. The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329. The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987 When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned. p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3. The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events: - For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3). - for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-57

Parameters Parameter list

p0326[0...n]

Motor stall torque correction factor / Mot M_stall_corr


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 5 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution: Note:

Sets the correction factor for the stall torque/force at a 600 V DC link voltage. When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0327[0...n]

Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 135.0 [] Factory setting 90.0 [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution: Note:

Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque. The load angle is measured at the rated motor current. When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. This parameter has no significance for induction motors. For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0328[0...n]

Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min -1000.00 [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [mH] Factory setting 0.00 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution: Note:

Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors). This parameter has no significance for induction motors. When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.

p0329[0...n]

Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the current for the pole position identification routine (p1980 = 1). For a two-stage technique (p1980 = 4) , the current is set for the 2nd phase. The current for the 1st phase is set in p0325.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: p0325, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.

1-58

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0330[0...n]

Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the rated motor slip. The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs. Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313 The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0331[0...n]

Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Induction motor: Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320. For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed. Synchronous motor: Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.

Dependency:

If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.

r0332[0...n]

Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the rated power factor for induction motors. For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0): For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed. For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed. For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1): For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed. For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.

Dependency: Note:

If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0333[0...n]

Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_4 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Displays the rated motor torque. IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-59

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

For induction motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311. For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328.

r0334[0...n]

Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 28_1 Min - [Nm/A] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max - [Nm/A] Factory setting - [Nm/A] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used. IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx). For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 is calculated from p0305, p0307 and p0311.

p0335[0...n]

Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1, 3), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 128 Non-ventilated Forced cooling Liquid cooling No fan Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description: Value:

Sets the motor cooling system used. 0: 1: 2: 128:

Dependency: Caution: Note:

For 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model. 1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.

r0337[0...n]

Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Displays the rated EMF of the motor. EMF: Electromagnetic force

p0340[0...n]

Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(3), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and U/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the rating plate data. 0: 1: 2: 3: No calculation Complete calculation Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters Calculation of closed-loop control parameters

1-60

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

4: 5: Notice:

Calculation of controller parameters Calculation of technological limits and threshold values

After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. The following parameters are influenced using p0340: p0340 = 1: --> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 --> p0341, p0342, p0344, p0612, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1611, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828 ... p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p3927, p3928 p0340 = 2: --> p0350, p0354 ... p0360 --> p0625 (matching p0350), p0626 ... p0628 p0340 = 3: --> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5 --> p0346, p0347, p0622, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1616, p1755, p1756, p2178 p0340 = 4: --> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1461, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740, p1756, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795 p0340 = 5: --> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148, p2150, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p2390, p2392, p2393

Note:

p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5. p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360). p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5. p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters. p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits. When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1. At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.

p0341[0...n]

Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 25_1 Min 0.000000 [kgm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max 100000.000000 [kgm] Factory setting 0.000000 [kgm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load). IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2 NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2 The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor. Refer to: p0342, r0345

Caution: Note:

When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.

p0342[0...n]

Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 1.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.000 Factory setting 1.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of inertia/mass (no load).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-61

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency:

This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector drive. Refer to: p0341, r0345 The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.

Note:

r0343[0...n]

Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the identified rated motor current.

p0344[0...n]

Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), T Units group: 27_1 Min 0.0 [kg] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max 50000.0 [kg] Factory setting 0.0 [kg] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Caution: Note:

Sets the motor weight. IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0345[0...n]

Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor rated speed and the acceleration with motor rated torque (r0333).

Dependency:

Refer to: r0313, r0333, p0341, p0342

p0346[0...n]

Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor. This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction motor is magnetized during this time.

Caution:

If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can stall (refer to the note).

1-62

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3. For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384). For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant (r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses have been enabled.

p0347[0...n]

Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Sets the de-magnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled. The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time. The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3. For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate de-magnetizing of the induction motor and in an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is activated and the motor is rotating).

p0350[0...n]

Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [ohm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2000.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Caution: Note:

Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625 (phase value). Refer to: p0625, r1912 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable resistance (p0352).

p0352[0...n]

Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 120.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Caution:

Resistance of the power cable between the power unit and motor. The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be repeated. The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance. The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the time that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value. The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.

Note:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-63

Parameters Parameter list

p0354[0...n]

Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [ohm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.00000 [ohm] Factory setting 0.00000 [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625. This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor data identification routine (p1910).

Dependency: Caution: Note:

Refer to: p0625 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).

p0356[0...n]

Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [mH] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Induction machine: sets the stator leakage inductance of the motor. Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor. This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).

Caution: Note:

When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960). For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for a low current.

p0357[0...n]

Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [mH] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor. This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).

Note:

For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current.

p0358[0...n]

Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rot leak


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [mH] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.

1-64

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910). Caution: Note: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).

p0360[0...n]

Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot Lh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00000 [mH] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00000 [mH] Factory setting 0.00000 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor. This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).

Caution: Note:

When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).

p0362[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 10.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 60.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Sets the first flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).

Dependency:

The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0366

Note:

For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0363[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 10.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 85.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Sets the second flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).

Dependency:

The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0367

Note:

For induction motors, p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-65

Parameters Parameter list

p0364[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 10.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 115.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic. Sets the third flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).

Dependency:

The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0368

Note:

For induction motors, p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0365[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 10.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.0 [%] Factory setting 125.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic. Sets the fourth flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).

Dependency:

The following applies for the flux values: p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365 Refer to: p0369

Note:

For induction motors, p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0366[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 5.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic. Sets the first magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization current (r0331).

Dependency:

The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0362

Note:

When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

1-66

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0367[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 5.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 75.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Sets the second magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization current (r0331).

Dependency:

The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0363

Note:

When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0368[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 5.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 150.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic. Sets the third magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization current (r0331).

Dependency:

The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0364

Note:

When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0369[0...n]

Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 5.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 800.0 [%] Factory setting 210.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic. Sets the fourth magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization current (r0331).

Dependency:

The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0365

Note:

When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-67

Parameters Parameter list

r0370[0...n]

Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature (p0625). The value does not include the cable resistance. Refer to: p0625

r0372[0...n]

Cable resistance / Mot R_cable


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Displays the total cable resistance between power unit and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance. Refer to: r0238, p0352

r0373[0...n]

Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627). Refer to: p0627 The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0374[0...n]

Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the motor rotor resistance at an ambient temperature p0625. Refer to: p0625 The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0376[0...n]

Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the rated motor rotor resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0628). Refer to: p0628 The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

1-68

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0377[0...n]

Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor including the motor reactor (p0233).

r0378[0...n]

Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the motor reactor (p0233).

r0382[0...n]

Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Mot L_magn transf


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0384[0...n]

Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Displays the rotor time constant. The parameter is not used for synchronous motors. The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor resistance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into account.

r0386[0...n]

Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Displays the stator leakage time constant. The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0358) divided by the total of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-69

Parameters Parameter list

r0395[0...n]

Actual stator resistance / R_stator act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value). The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance. In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model. Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620 In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the thermal motor model.

r0396[0...n]

Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual rotor resistance (phase value). The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model. Refer to: p0354, p0620 In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the thermal motor model. This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

p0422[0...n]

Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(4) Units group: Min 0 [nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4294967295 [nm] Factory setting 100 [nm] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS

Description: Caution:

Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. This parameter is automatically pre-set for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution , e.g. 100 nm. This value must be entered here.

Note:

p0490
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Meas. probe invert / Probe inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 03 Signal name DI 3 (T. 8)

Max 1 signal Inverted

Factory setting 0000 bin 0 signal Not inverted FP -

Setting to invert the digital input signals to connect a measuring probe.

1-70

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0580 When the measuring probe is inverted, this has no effect on the status displays of the digital inputs (r0721, r0722, r0723).

p0500
PM230

Technology application / Tec application


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Units group: Min 3 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 3 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the technology application. The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using p0340 = 5.

Value: Notice: Note:

3:

Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization

If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode (p1300) is pre-set accordingly. The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows: - when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 - when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5 For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: - p1574 = 2 V - p1580 = 100 % (efficiency optimization) - p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency. - p1802 = 10 (SVM/FLB with overmodulation and modulation depth reduction over 57 Hz) - p1803 = 115 %

p0500
PM240 PM250, PM260

Technology application / Tec application


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the technology application. The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using p0340 = 5.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3:

Standard drive Pumps and fans Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads) Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization

Notice: Note:

If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode (p1300) is pre-set accordingly. The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows: - when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 - when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5 For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: - p1574 = 10 V - p1750.2 = 0 - p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0, PM260: p1802 = 2) - p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %) For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: - p1574 = 2 V - p1750.2 = 0 - p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0) - p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-71

Parameters Parameter list

For p0500 = 2 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: - p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V) - p1750.2 = 1 - p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0) - p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %) For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set: - p1574 = 2 V - p1750.2 = 1 - p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0) - p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %) Re p1750: The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors. p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency. This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses are inhibited. Re p1802 / p1803: p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.

p0505

Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(5) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 SI system of units System of units, referred/SI US system of units System of units, referred/US Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the actual system of units. 1: 2: 3: 4:

Dependency: Caution:

The parameter cannot be changed when master control is active. If a per unit representation is selected and if the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then the physical significance of several control parameters is also adapted at the same time. As a consequence, the control behavior can change (see p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620). Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units.

Note:

p0573

Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Notice:

Setting to inhibit the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and closed-loop control parameters (p0340, p3900). 0: 1: No Yes

The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.g. p0305) are entered and only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning. Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated (p0340, p3900), the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically re-activated.

1-72

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

If value = 0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters. If value = 1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.

p0580
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Measuring probe, input terminal / MT input terminal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description: Value: Dependency: Note: 0: 23: No meas probe DI 3 (T. 8)

Max 23

Factory setting 0

Sets the input terminal for the measuring probe for speed actual value measurement.

Refer to: p0581 DI: Digital Input

p0581
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Measuring probe, edge / MT edge


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description: 0: 0/1 edge 1: 1/0 edge Dependency: Refer to: p0580

Max 1

Factory setting 0

Sets the edge to evaluate the measuring probe signal for speed actual value measurement.

p0582
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Measuring probe, pulses per revolution / MT pulses per rev


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Min 1 Description:

Max 12

Factory setting 1

Sets the number of pulses per revolution (e.g. for disks with holes).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-73

Parameters Parameter list

p0583
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Measuring probe, maximum measuring time / MT t_meas max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Min 0.040 [s] Description:

Max 10.000 [s]

Factory setting 10.000 [s]

Sets the maximum measuring time for the measuring probe. If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measuring time has expired, then the speed actual value in r0586 is set to zero. This timer is re-started with the next pulse.

Dependency:

Refer to: r0586

p0585
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Measuring probe gear factor / Probe gear factor


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Min 0.00000 Description: Sets the BERO gear factor.

Max 1000.00000

Factory setting 1.00000

The measured speed is multiplied by the BERO gear factor and is displayed in r0586.

r0586
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CO: Measuring probe, speed actual value / MT n_act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Min - [rpm] Description: Dependency: Note: Refer to: p0580, p0583

Max - [rpm]

Factory setting - [rpm]

Displays the speed actual value measured using the BERO. For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.

r0587
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CO: Measuring probe, measuring time measured / MT t_meas measured


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description:

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the time between the last two BERO pulses. The measuring time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 s.

1-74

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measured time in p0583 expires, then r0587 is set to the maximum measuring time. Dependency: Note: Refer to: p0580 For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.

r0588
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CO: Measuring probe, pulse counter / MT pulse counter


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Dependency: Note: Refer to: p0580

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the number of measuring pulses that have occurred (been received) up until now. After reaching 4294967295 (2^32 - 1), the counter starts again at 0.

r0589
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Measuring probe, delay time / MT t_delay


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description:

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the time since the last measuring pulse was detected. The delay time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 s. When a measuring pulse occurs (is received) the delay time is reset and is limited to the maximum measuring time in p0583.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0580 For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.

p0595

Technological unit selection / Tech unit select


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(5) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 46 % 1 referred, no dimensions bar C Pa ltr/s m/s ltr/min m/min ltr/h m/h kg/s kg/min kg/h Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller. 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-75

Parameters Parameter list

15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: Dependency:

t/min t/h N kN Nm psi F gallon/s inch/s gallon/min inch/min gallon/h inch/h lb/s lb/min lb/h lbf lbf ft K rpm parts/min m/s ft/s ft/min BTU/min BTU/h mbar inch wg ft wg m wg % r.h. g/kg

Only units of parameters with unit group 9_1 can be changed over using this parameter. Refer to: p0596

p0596

Technological unit reference quantity / Tech unit ref qty


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0.01 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 340.28235E36 Factory setting 1.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for the technological units. When changing over using changeover parameter p0595 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the reference quantity.

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p0595 When changing over from one technological unit into another, or when changing the reference parameter, a changeover is not made.

p0601[0...n]

Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 No sensor PTC alarm & timer Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description: Value:

Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring. 0: 1:

1-76

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

2: 4: Dependency: Caution:

KTY84 Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer

The thermal motor model is only calculated for p0612.1 = 1. Re sensor type "KTY84" (p0601 = 2): If the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor resistances must be switched out (p0620 = 0). Otherwise, in controlled-loop operation, torque errors will occur that will mean that the motor will not be able to be stopped.

Note:

Re sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p0601 = 1): Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm.

p0604[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod 1/KTY alarm threshold / Mod 1/KTY A thresh


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_1 Min 0.0 [C] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 240.0 [C] Factory setting 130.0 [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 or KTY. After the alarm threshold is exceeded, alarm A07910 is output and timer (p0606) is started. If the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011 is output.

Dependency: Caution: Note:

Refer to: p0606, p0612 Refer to: F07011, A07910 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The hysteresis is 2 K. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0605[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod 1/2 threshold / Threshold


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_1 Min 0.0 [C] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 240.0 [C] Factory setting 145.0 [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1/2. Motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1): alarm threshold - Alarm A07910 is output after the alarm threshold is exceeded. Motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1): fault threshold - Fault F07911 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded.

Dependency: Caution: Note:

Refer to: p0606, p0611, p0612 Refer to: F07011, A07012 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The hysteresis is 2 K. When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-77

Parameters Parameter list

p0606[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod 2/KTY timer / Mod 2/KTY t_timer


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the timer for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 2 or KTY. This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded. If the timer has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011 is output. If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011 is immediately output.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0604, p0605 Refer to: F07011, A07910 With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is de-activated and only the fault threshold is effective. KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is exceeded. PTC sensor, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance.

p0607[0...n]

Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600.000 [s] Factory setting 0.100 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault. If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corresponding fault is output.

Notice: Note:

The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of 48 ms. If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output. Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.

p0610[0...n]

Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 No response only alarm no reduction of I_max Alarm with reduction of I_max and fault Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max Factory setting 2 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description: Value:

Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold. 0: 1: 2:

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605 Refer to: F07011, A07910 The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4). The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency. If value = 0: p0606 is not started, therefore only alarm A07910 is output. If value = 1: PTC: Same as value = 2 because there is no reduction in I_max. KTY84: Alarm A07910 is output, I_max is reduced and p0606 is started. After p0606 has elapsed, fault F0711 is set.

1-78

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

If value = 2: Alarm A07910 is output and p0606 is started. After p0606 has elapsed, fault F0711 is set.

p0611[0...n]

I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20000 [s] Factory setting 0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the winding time constant. The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill current up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.

Dependency:

This parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615 Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910

Caution:

This parameter is automatically pre-set from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.

Note:

When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (also refer to p0612). If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to p0625.

p0612[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod activation / Mot_temp_mod act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Activating motor temperature model 1 (I2t) Activate motor temperature model 2 1 signal Yes Yes Factory setting 0010 bin 0 signal No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS

Description: Bit field:

Setting to activate the motor temperature model. Bit 00 01

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0034, p0604, p0605, p0606, p0611, p0615, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628 Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910 Mot_temp_mod: motor temperature model Re bit 00: This bit is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). It is only possible to activate this motor temperature model (I2t) for a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0). Re bit 01: This bit is used to activate/deactivate the motor temperature model for induction motors.

p0615[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold / I2t F thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_1 Min 0.0 [C] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 220.0 [C] Factory setting 180.0 [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 (I2t). - Fault F07911 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded. The parameter is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612 Refer to: F07011, A07012

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-79

Parameters Parameter list

Caution: Note:

When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. The hysteresis is 2 K.

p0620[0...n]

Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description: Value:

Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance according to r0395 and r0396. 0: 1: 2: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature

Note:

For p0620 = 1, the following applies: The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model temperature in r0633. For p0620 = 2, the following applies: The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting the rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows: theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035

p0621[0...n]

Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(3), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description:

Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control). The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model. p0621 = 1: Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is powered up for the first time (pulse enable) after booting the Control Unit. p0621 = 2: Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is powered up (pulse enable).

Value:

0: 1: 2:

No Rs identification Rs identification after switching-on again Rs identification after switching-on each time

Dependency:

- perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor. - enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625. Refer to: p0622, r0623

Notice:

The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY) to a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding. Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase of the induction motor.

Note:

The measurement is carried out: - For induction motors - When vector control is active (see p1300) - If a temperature sensor (KTY) has not been connected - When the motor is at a standstill when switched on

1-80

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a third of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure). If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the measurement.

p0622[0...n]

Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after powering up again (restart). Refer to: p0621, r0623 For p0622 < p0346 the following applies: If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement is complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also depends on the settling time of the measured current. For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies: Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possible magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling time plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.

r0623

Stator resistance of Rs identification after powering up again / R_stator Rs-Id


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the identified stator resistance after the Rs identification after powering up again. Refer to: p0621, p0622

p0625[0...n]

Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_1 Min -40 [C] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 80 [C] Factory setting 20 [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model. The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature. If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).

p0626[0...n]

Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_2 Min 20 [K] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 200 [K] Factory setting 50 [K] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature. For 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Refer to: p0625

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-81

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0627[0...n]

Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_2 Min 20 [K] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 200 [K] Factory setting 80 [K] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature. For 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Refer to: p0625 When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

p0628[0...n]

Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor


Access level: 4 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: 21_2 Min 20 [K] Calculated: p0340 = 1,2 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 200 [K] Factory setting 100 [K] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature. For 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311. Refer to: p0625 When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (refer to p0300).

r0630[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature / Mod T_ambient


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 21_1 Min - [C] Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model.

r0631[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature / Mod T_stator


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 21_1 Min - [C] Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model.

r0632[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature / Mod T_winding


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 21_1 Min - [C] Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.

1-82

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0633[0...n]

Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature / Mod T_rotor


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 21_1 Min - [C] Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [C] Factory setting - [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Note:

Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model. For motor temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1), this parameter is not valid:

p0634[0...n]

Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [Vsrms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.000 [Vsrms] Factory setting 0.000 [Vsrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function.

p0635[0...n]

Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current. Refer to: p0634

p0636[0...n]

Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current. Refer to: p0634

p0637[0...n]

Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [mH] Factory setting 0.00 [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current. Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-83

Parameters Parameter list

p0640[0...n]

Current limit / Current limit


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the current limit. Refer to: r0209, p0323 The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when changing p0305. The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209. The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the power unit. The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5. p0640 is limited to 4.0 x p0305. p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g. to 1.5 x p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]). p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).

p0641[0...n]

CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the variable current limit. The value is referred to p0640.

p0650[0...n]

Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 [h] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4294967295 [h] Factory setting 0 [h] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor. The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is withdrawn, the counter is held and the value saved.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0651 Refer to: A01590 The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0. The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).

p0651[0...n]

Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 [h] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150000 [h] Factory setting 0 [h] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor. An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached.

1-84

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0650 Refer to: A01590 For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled. When setting p0651 to 0, then p0650 is automatically set to 0. The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).

r0720[0...4]

CU number of inputs and outputs / CU I/O count


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the number of inputs and outputs [0] = Number of digital inputs [1] = Number of digital outputs [2] = Number of digital input/outputs bidirectional [3] = Number of analog inputs [4] = Number of analog outputs

r0721
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual value at the digital inputs. This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 11

Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0

1 signal High High High High High

0 signal Low Low Low Low Low

FP -

Note:

DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

r0721
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description:

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the actual value at the digital inputs. This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03

Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8)

1 signal High High High High

0 signal Low Low Low Low

FP -

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-85

Parameters Parameter list

04 05 11 12 Note:

DI 4 (T. 16) DI 5 (T. 17) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1

High High High High

Low Low Low Low

DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

r0722.0...11
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 1 signal High High High High High Factory setting 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status of the digital inputs. Bit 00 01 02 03 11

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0723 AI: Analog Input DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

r0722.0...12
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 4 (T. 16) DI 5 (T. 17) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1

Max 1 signal High High High High High High High High

Factory setting 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP -

Displays the status of the digital inputs.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0723 AI: Analog Input DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

1-86

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0723.0...11
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 1 signal High High High High High Factory setting 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs. Bit 00 01 02 03 11

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0722 DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

r0723.0...12
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 4 (T. 16) DI 5 (T. 17) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1

Max 1 signal High High High High High High High High

Factory setting 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP -

Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0722 DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

p0724

CU digital inputs debounce time / CU DI t_debounce


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.000 [ms] Factory setting 4.000 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the debounce time for digital inputs. The digital inputs are read in cyclically every 2 ms (DI 11, DI 12 every 4 ms). To debounce the signals, the set debounce time is converted into integer multiple debounce clock cycles Tp (Tp = p0724 / 2 ms). DI: Digital Input

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-87

Parameters Parameter list

p0730

BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 52.3 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the signal source for terminal DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18). The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

p0731
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Min Description: Notice: Note:

Max -

Factory setting 52.7

Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (NO: T. 21). The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

p0732
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Min Description: Notice: Note:

Max -

Factory setting 52.2

Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23). The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

r0747
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) 1 signal High Factory setting 0 signal Low FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status of digital outputs. Bit 00

1-88

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.

r0747
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Displays the status of digital outputs. Bit 00 01 02 Signal name DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) DO 1 (NO: T. 21) DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23)

Max 1 signal High High High

Factory setting 0 signal Low Low Low FP -

Note:

DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.

p0748
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) 1 signal Inverted Factory setting 0000 bin 0 signal Not inverted FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field: Note:

Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs. Bit 00

DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

p0748
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 Signal name DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) DO 1 (NO: T. 21) DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23)

Max 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted

Factory setting 0000 bin 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP -

Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-89

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

DO: Digital Output T: Terminal Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

r0751.0...9

BO: CU analog inputs status word / CU AI status word


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Analog input AI0 wire breakage Analog input AI1 wire breakage Analog input AI0 no wire breakage Analog input AI1 no wire breakage 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status of analog inputs. Bit 00 01 08 09

Note:

AI: Analog Input

r0752[0...1]

CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual / CU AI U/I_inp act


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input. Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in. [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The type of analog input AIx (voltage or current input) is set using p0756. Refer to: p0756 AI: Analog Input T: Terminal

p0753[0...1]

CU analog inputs smoothing time constant / CU AI T_smooth


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs. [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) AI: Analog Input T: Terminal

1-90

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0755[0...1]

CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent / CU AI value in %


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs. When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x. [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) AI: Analog Input T: Terminal

p0756[0...1]

CU analog inputs type / CU AI type


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 8 Factory setting [0] 4 [1] 4 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the type of analog inputs. p0756[0...1] = 0, 1, 4 corresponds to a voltage input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in V). p0756[0...1] = 2, 3 corresponds to a current input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in mA). In addition, the associated DIP switch must be set. For the voltage input, DIP switch AI0/1 must be set to "U". For the current input, DIP switch AI0/1 or AI2 must be set to "I".

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 8:

Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V) Unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V) Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA) Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA to +20 mA) Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V) No sensor connected

Index: Warning:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The maximum voltage difference between analog input terminals AI+, AI-, and the ground must not exceed 35 V. If the system is operated when the load resistor is switched on (DIP switch set to "I"), the voltage between differential inputs AI+ and AI- must not exceed 10 V or the injected 80 mA current otherwise the input will be damaged.

Note:

When changing p0756 , the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0757, p0758, p0759, p0760) are overwritten with the following default values: For p0756 = 0, 1, 4, p0757 is set to 0.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %. For p0756 = 2, p0757 is set to 0.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %. For p0756 = 3, p0757 is set to 4.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.

p0757[0...1]

CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 / CU AI char x1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -50.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 160.000 Factory setting 0.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-91

Parameters Parameter list

Index: Note:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0758[0...1]

CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 / CU AI char y1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -1000.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Note:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0759[0...1]

CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 / CU AI char x2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -50.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 160.000 Factory setting 10.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Note:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0760[0...1]

CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 / CU AI char y2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -1000.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Note:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0761[0...1]

CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring response threshold / CU WireBrkThresh


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.00 Factory setting 2.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the response threshold for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs. The unit for the parameter value depends on the set analog input type.

1-92

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Index: Dependency:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active: p0756[0...1] = 1 (unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)), unit [V] p0756[0...1] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)), unit [mA] Refer to: p0756

Note:

AI: Analog Input When p0761 = 0, wire breakage monitoring is not carried out.

p0762[0...1]

CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time / CU wire brk t_del
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Sets the delay time for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs. [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) AI: Analog Input

p0771[0...1]

CI: CU analog outputs signal source / CU AO S_src


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting [0] 21[0] [1] 27[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Sets the signal source for the analog outputs. [0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) AO: Analog Output T: Terminal

r0772[0...1]

CU analog outputs, output value currently referred / CU AO outp_val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs. [0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) AO: Analog Output T: Terminal

p0773[0...1]

CU analog outputs smoothing time constant / CU AO T_smooth


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog outputs.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-93

Parameters Parameter list

Index: Note:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) AO: Analog Output T: Terminal

r0774[0...1]

CU analog outputs output voltage/current actual / CU AO U/I_outp


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency: Note:

Displays the actual output voltage or output current at the analog outputs. [0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) Refer to: p0776 AO: Analog Output T: Terminal

p0775[0...1]

CU analog outputs activate absolute value generation / CU AO absVal act


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Index: Note:

Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs. 0: 1:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) AO: Analog Output T: Terminal

p0776[0...1]

CU analog outputs type / CU AO type


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the analog output type. p0776[x] = 1 corresponds to a voltage output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in V). p0776[x] = 0, 2 corresponds to a current output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in mA).

Value:

0: 1: 2:

Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA) Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V) Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA)

Index: Note:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) When changing p0776, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780) are overwritten with the following default values: For p0776 = 0, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA. For p0776 = 1, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 V, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 10.0 V. For p0776 = 2, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 4.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.

1-94

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0777[0...1]

CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 / CU AO char x1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -1000.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Dependency: Notice: Note:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) Refer to: p0776 This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs). The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0778[0...1]

CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 / CU char y1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -20.000 [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Dependency: Notice: Note:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type. Refer to: p0776 This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs). The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0779[0...1]

CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 / CU char x2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -1000.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Dependency: Notice: Note:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) Refer to: p0776 This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs). The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-95

Parameters Parameter list

p0780[0...1]

CU analog outputs characteristic value y2 / CU char y2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -20.000 [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20.000 [V] Factory setting 20.000 [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs. The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.

Index: Dependency: Notice: Note:

[0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type. Refer to: p0776 This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs). The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.

p0782[0...1]

BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source / CU AO inv S_src


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals. [0] = AO0 (T 12/13) [1] = AO1 (T 26/27) AO: Analog Output T: Terminal

r0785.0...1

BO: CU analog outputs status word / CU AO ZSW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name AO 0 negative AO 1 negative 1 signal Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status of analog outputs. Bit 00 01

Note:

AO: Analog Output

p0795
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) 1 signal Simulation Simulation Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0 signal Terminal eval Terminal eval FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs. Bit 00 01

1-96

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

02 03 11 Dependency: Note:

DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0

Simulation Simulation Simulation

Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval

The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796. Refer to: p0796 This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971). DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

p0795
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 4 (T. 16) DI 5 (T. 17) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1

Max 1 signal Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation Simulation

Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0 signal Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval Terminal eval FP -

Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.

Dependency: Note:

The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796. Refer to: p0796 This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971). DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

p0796
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP

CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 1 signal High High High High High Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode. Bit 00 01 02 03 11

Dependency: Note:

The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795. Refer to: p0795 This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971). AI: Analog Input DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-97

Parameters Parameter list

p0796
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 Signal name DI 0 (T. 5) DI 1 (T. 6) DI 2 (T. 7) DI 3 (T. 8) DI 4 (T. 16) DI 5 (T. 17) DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1

Max 1 signal High High High High High High High High

Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0 signal Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low FP -

Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.

Dependency: Note:

The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795. Refer to: p0795 This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971). AI: Analog Input DI: Digital Input T: Terminal

p0797[0...1]

CU analog inputs simulation mode / CU AI sim_mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Terminal evaluation for analog input x Simulation for analog input x Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Index: Dependency: Note:

Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs. 0: 1:

[0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11) The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p0798. Refer to: p0798 This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971). AI: Analog Input

p0798[0...1]

CU analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU AI sim setp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -50.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2000.000 Factory setting 0.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Sets the setpoint for the input value in the simulation mode of the analog inputs. [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4) [1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)

1-98

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency:

The simulation of an analog input is selected using p0797. If AI x is parameterized as a voltage input (p0756), the setpoint is a voltage in V. If AI x is parameterized as a current input (p0756), the setpoint is a current in mA. Refer to: p0756, p0797

Note:

This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971). AI: Analog Input

p0802

Data transfer: memory card as source/target / mem_card src/targ


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to memory card. Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1): - Sets the source of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 48 --> PS048xxx.ACX is the source). Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2): - Sets the target of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 23 --> PS023xxx.ACX is the target).

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p0803, p0804 If the data between the volatile and non-volatile device memories differ, then it may be necessary to save the data on the memory card in a non-volatile fashion prior to the transfer (e.g. p0971 = 1).

p0803

Data transfer: device memory as source/target / Dev_mem src/targ


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 12 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to device memory. Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1): - Sets the target of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 10 --> PS010xxx.ACX is the target). Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2): - Sets the source of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 11 --> PS011xxx.ACX is the source).

Value:

0: 10: 11: 12:

Source/target standard Source/target with setting 10 Source/target with setting 11 Source/target with setting 12

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p0802, p0804 If the data between the volatile and non-volatile device memories differ, then it may be necessary to save the data on the memory card in a non-volatile fashion prior to the transfer (e.g. p0971 = 1).

p0804
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Data transfer start / Data transf start


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description:

Max 1100

Factory setting 0

Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-99

Parameters Parameter list

Example 1: The parameter backup is to be transferred from the device memory to the memory card with setting 0. The parameter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22. p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22) p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0) p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card) --> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX. Example 2: The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the device memory with setting 22. The parameter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 0. p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22) p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as target with setting 0) p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory) --> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS000xxx.ACX. Example 3 (only supported for PROFIBUS/PROFINET): The PROFIBUS or PROFINET device master data (GSD) should be transferred from the device memory to the memory card. p0802 = (not relevant) p0803 = (not relevant) p0804 = 12 (start transferring the GSD files to the memory card) --> The GSD files are transferred from the device memory to the memory card and stored in the /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG directory. Value: 0: 1: 2: 12: 1001: 1002: 1003: 1100: Inactive Memory card to device memory Device memory to memory card Device memory (GSD files) to memory card File on memory card cannot be opened File in device memory cannot be opened Memory card not found File cannot be transferred

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p0802, p0803 The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred. For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on (PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory. When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to the memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM"). Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes: p0804 = 1001: The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient memory space available on the memory card. p0804 = 1002: The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient memory space available in the device memory. p0804 = 1003: No memory card has been inserted.

1-100

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0804
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Data transfer start / Data transf start


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1100 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory. Example 1: The parameter backup is to be transferred from the device memory to the memory card with setting 0. The parameter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22. p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22) p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0) p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card) --> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX. Example 2: The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the device memory with setting 22. The parameter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 0. p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22) p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as target with setting 0) p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory) --> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS000xxx.ACX. Example 3 (only supported for PROFIBUS/PROFINET): The PROFIBUS or PROFINET device master data (GSD) should be transferred from the device memory to the memory card. p0802 = (not relevant) p0803 = (not relevant) p0804 = 12 (start transferring the GSD files to the memory card) --> The GSD files are transferred from the device memory to the memory card and stored in the /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG directory.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 1001: 1002: 1003: 1100:

Inactive Memory card to device memory Device memory to memory card File on memory card cannot be opened File in device memory cannot be opened Memory card not found File cannot be transferred

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p0802, p0803 The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred. For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on (PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory. When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to the memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM"). Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes: p0804 = 1001: The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient memory space available on the memory card. p0804 = 1002: The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient memory space available in the device memory.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-101

Parameters Parameter list

p0804 = 1003: No memory card has been inserted.

p0806

BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to block the master control. Refer to: r0807 The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example.

r0807.0

BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays what has the master control. The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software). Bit 00 Signal name Master control active 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP 5030, 6031

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p0806 The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device. Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example.

p0809[0...2]

Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another. [0] = Source Command Data Set [1] = Target Command Data Set [2] = Start copying procedure Refer to: r3996 When the command data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur. Procedure: 1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied. 2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

1-102

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0810
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Min Description: Dependency: Notice: Note: Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836

Max -

Factory setting 722.3

Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0). The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.

p0810
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0). Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.

p0811

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1). Refer to: r0050, p0810, r0836 The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.

p0819[0...2]

Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(15) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another. [0] = Source Drive Data Set [1] = Target Drive Data Set [2] = Start copying procedure Refer to: r3996

Dependency:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-103

Parameters Parameter list

Notice: Note:

When the drive data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur. Procedure: 1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied. 2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

p0820[0...n]

BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(15), T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0). Refer to: r0051, p0826, r0837 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0821[0...n]

BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(15), T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1). Refer to: r0051, r0837 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0826[0...n]

Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(3), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS

Description:

Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the drive data set changeover. If the same motor is driven by different drive data sets, the same motor number must also be entered in these data sets. If the motor is also switched with the drive data set, different motor numbers must be used. In this case, the data set can only be switched when the pulse inhibit is set.

Note:

If the motor numbers are identical, the same thermal motor model is used for calculation after data set changeover. If different motor numbers are used, different models are also used for calculating (the inactive motor cools down in each case). For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).

r0835.2...8

CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.

1-104

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Bit field:

Bit 02 04 05 07 08

Signal name Internal parameter calculation active Armature short circuit active Identification running Rotating measurement running Motor data identification running

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No No

FP -

Note:

Re bit 02: A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation. Re bit 04: A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated. Re bit 05: A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running. Re bit 07: A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running. Re bit 08: A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.

r0836.0...1

CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name CDS select. bit 0 CDS select. bit 1 1 signal ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input. Bit 00 01

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811 Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.

r0837.0...1

CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DDS select. bit 0 DDS select. bit 1 1 signal ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input. Bit 00 01

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821 Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following. The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051. If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-105

Parameters Parameter list

p0840[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.0 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0). Refer to: p1055, p1056 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056. The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056. For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switch-on inhibit is acknowledged. Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Note:

For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switch-on inhibit) For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse suppression For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancelation when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227) For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)

p0840[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting [0] 722.0 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0). Refer to: p1055, p1056 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056. The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056. For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switch-on inhibit is acknowledged.

1-106

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switch-on inhibit) For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse suppression For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancelation when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227) For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies: - BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)

p0844[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.1 [1] 1 [2] 2090.1 [3] 2090.1

Description:

Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1" - BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1). BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal - OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal - No OFF2 (enable is possible)

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0844[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1" - BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1). BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal - OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-107

Parameters Parameter list

BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal - No OFF2 (enable is possible) Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0845[0...n]

BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_src 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the second signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1" - BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1). BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal - OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal - No OFF2 (enable is possible)

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.

p0848[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.2 [1] 1 [2] 2090.2 [3] 2090.2

Description:

Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1" - BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2). BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal - OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal - No OFF3 (enable is possible)

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

1-108

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0848[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1" - BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2). BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal - OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal - No OFF3 (enable is possible)

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0849[0...n]

BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_src 2
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the second signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)". The following signals are AND'ed: - BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1" - BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2" For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2). BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal - OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit) BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal - No OFF3 (enable is possible)

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-109

Parameters Parameter list

p0852[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.3 [1] 1 [2] 2090.3 [3] 2090.3

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3). BI: p0852 = 0 signal Inhibit operation (suppress pulses). BI: p0852 = 1 signal Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p0852[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3). BI: p0852 = 0 signal Inhibit operation (suppress pulses). BI: p0852 = 1 signal Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

1-110

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p0854[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.10 [1] 1 [2] 2090.10 [3] 2090.10

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10). BI: p0854 = 0 signal No control by PLC BI: p0852 = 1 signal Master ctrl by PLC.

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available, then binector input p0854 should be set to 1. If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).

p0854[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10). BI: p0854 = 0 signal No control by PLC BI: p0852 = 1 signal Master ctrl by PLC.

Caution:

When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available, then binector input p0854 should be set to 1. If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-111

Parameters Parameter list

p0855[0...n]

BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake". Refer to: p0858 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake).

p0856[0...n]

BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12). 0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero. 1 signal: Enable speed controller.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0898 If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed. If "speed controller enable" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed.

p0857

Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 100.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 60000.0 [ms] Factory setting 10000.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the monitoring time for the power unit. The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a READY signal within the monitoring time, fault F07802 is output.

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: F07802, F30027 The maximum time to pre-charge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum pre-charging duration depends on the power unit. The monitoring time for the pre-charging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is output when the maximum pre-charging duration is exceeded.

Note:

The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power unit. The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to pre-charge the DC link and, if relevant, the de-bounce time of the contactors. If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.

p0858[0...n]

BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake".

1-112

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0855 The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake). For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a zero setpoint is entered.

p0897

BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function. BI: p0897 = 0 signal The function "parking axis" is not selected. BI: p0897 = 1 signal The function "parking axis" is selected.

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed.

r0898.0...14

CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 OC / OFF3 Operation enable Ramp-function generator enable Continue ramp-function generator Speed setpoint enable Command open brake Jog 1 Jog 2 Master ctrl by PLC Speed controller enable Command close brake 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the control word of the sequence control. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 14

Note:

OC: Operating condition Re bit 10: If p0700 = 2 is set, bit 10 always shows "1".

r0899.0...13

CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the status word of the sequence control.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-113

Parameters Parameter list

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13

Signal name Rdy for switch on Ready Operation enabled Jog active No coasting active No Quick Stop active Switching on inhibited active Drive ready Controller enable Control request Pulses enabled Open holding brake Command close holding brake

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes OFF2 inactive OFF3 inactive Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No OFF2 active OFF3 active No No No No No No No

FP -

Note:

Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09: For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.

p0918
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS address / PB address


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 126 Factory setting 126 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit. The address can be set as follows: 1) Using the DIP switch on the Control Unit. --> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address. --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. 2) Using p0918 --> Only if all of the DIP switches are set to ON or OFF. --> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM". --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

Notice:

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. For p0014 = 0, the following applies: Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.

Note:

Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126 Address 126 is used for commissioning. Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

p0922
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Min 1 Description: Value: Sets the send and receive telegram. 1: 20: 350: 352:

Max 999 Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6

Factory setting 1

1-114

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

353: 354: 999: Dependency: Note:

SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4 SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4 Free telegram configuration with BICO

Refer to: F01505 If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited. The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.

r0944

CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109

r0945[0...63]

Fault code / Fault code


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred. Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136 The properties of the fault buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Fault buffer structure (general principle): r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1 ... r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8 r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1 ... r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8 ... r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1 ... r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8

r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Description: Dependency: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit. The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code. The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-115

Parameters Parameter list

r0947[0...63]

Fault number / Fault number


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

This parameter is identical to r0945.

r0948[0...63]

Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136 The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds). The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.

r0949[0...63]

Fault value / Fault value


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Integer32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number). Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136 The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.

p0952

Fault cases, counter / Fault cases qty


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset. The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136

r0963
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.

1-116

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 255:

9.6 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 93.75 kbit/s 187.5 kbit/s 500 kbit/s 1.5 Mbit/s 3 Mbit/s 6 Mbit/s 12 Mbit/s 31.25 kbit/s 45.45 kbit/s unknown

r0964[0...6]

Device identification / Device ident.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the device identification. [0] = Company (Siemens = 42) [1] = Device type [2] = Firmware version [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) [5] = Number of drive objects [6] = Firmware patch/hot fix Example: r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS r0964[1] = device type, see below r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6) r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010 r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May r0964[5] = 1 --> 1 drive object r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00) Device type: r0964[1] = 6100 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240B-2_DP r0964[1] = 6103 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240B-2 r0964[1] = 6210 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_DP r0964[1] = 6211 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_PN r0964[1] = 6213 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2 r0964[1] = 6220 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_DP_F r0964[1] = 6221 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_PN_F r0964[1] = 6223 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2_F

Note:

r0965
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Min Description: Constant value = 0329 hex.

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-117

Parameters Parameter list

Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1 Note: When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.

p0969

System runtime relative / t_System relative


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON. The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0. The value overflows after approx. 49 days. When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.

p0970

Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 30) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the drive parameters. Parameters p0100, p0205 are not reset. The following motor parameters are defined in accordance with the power unit: p0300 ... p0311. When downloading settings 10, 11, 12, the buffer memory mode is automatically deactivated (p0014 = 0).

Value:

0: 1: 3: 5: 10: 11: 12: 100: 300:

Inactive Start a parameter reset Start dnload of volatile parameters from RAM Starts a safety parameter reset Starts to download setting 10 Starts to download setting 11 Starts to download setting 12 Start a BICO interconnection reset Only Siemens int

Dependency: Caution: Notice:

Refer to: F01659 When the buffer memory is active (see p0014), the actual parameters are backed up from RAM to ROM when a parameter set is loaded (p0970 = 10, 11, 12). After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. Peculiarities of communication via PROFIBUS DP: - Communication with Class 1 masters (e.g. S7 controllers) is interrupted. - Communication with Class 2 masters (e.g. STARTER) is retained.

Note:

A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset). At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0. For p0970 = 5 the following applies: The password for Safety Integrated must be set. When Safety Integrated is enabled, this can result in error messages, which then require an acceptance test to be performed. Then save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON. For p0970 = 1 the following applies: If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), then the safety parameters are not reset. In this case, an error message (F01659) is output with fault value 2.

1-118

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The following generally applies: One index of parameters p2100, p2101, p2118, p2119, p2126, p2127 is not reset, if a parameterized message is precisely active in this index.

p0971

Save parameters / Save par


Access level: 1 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 12 Inactive Save drive object Save in non-volatile memory as setting 10 Save in non-volatile memory as setting 11 Save in non-volatile memory as setting 12 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Setting to save parameters in the non-volatile memory. 0: 1: 10: 11: 12:

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: p1960, r3996 If a memory card (optional) is inserted, the following applies: The parameters are also saved on the card and therefore overwrite any existing data!

Caution: Notice:

The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0). Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving. The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.

p0972

Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Inactive Hardware-Reset immediate Hardware reset preparation Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit. 0: 1: 2: 3:

Danger:

It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition. The memory card/device memory of the Control Unit must not be accessed.

Note:

If value = 1: Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted. After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below). If value = 2: Help to check the reset operation. Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no longer acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted. After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below). If value = 3: The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized reset by a control for several drive units. If cyclic communication is not active, then the reset is immediately executed. After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-119

Parameters Parameter list

To check the reset operation: After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the following: p0972 = 0? --> The reset was successfully executed. p0972 > 0? --> The reset was not executed.

r0980[0...299]

List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the parameters that exist for this drive. Refer to: r0981, r0989 The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0981[0...299]

List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the parameters that exist for this drive. Refer to: r0980, r0989 The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0989[0...299]

List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the parameters that exist for this drive. Refer to: r0980, r0981 The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

1-120

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r0990[0...99]

List of modified parameters 1 / List chang. par 1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive. Refer to: r0991, r0999 Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0991[0...99]

List of modified parameters 2 / List chang. par 2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive. Refer to: r0990, r0999 Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0999[0...99]

List of modified parameters 10 / List chang. par 10


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive. Refer to: r0990, r0991 Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. This list consists solely of the following parameters: r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-121

Parameters Parameter list

p1000[0...n]
CU240B-2

Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200 Factory setting 2 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the speed setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 6: 10: 11: 12: 13: 16: 20: 21: 22: 23: 26: 30: 31: 32: 33: 36: 60: 61: 62: 63: 66: 200:

No main setpoint Motorized potentiometer Analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint Motor potentiometer + fieldbus Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + motor potentiometer Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus Analog output connection

Dependency: Caution:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076 If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically: p2051[1] = r0063

Caution: Notice:

When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922. For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 = 999.

1-122

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1000[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP

Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200 Factory setting 6 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the speed setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 6: 10: 11: 12: 13: 16: 20: 21: 22: 23: 26: 30: 31: 32: 33: 36: 60: 61: 62: 63: 66: 200:

No main setpoint Motorized potentiometer Analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint Motor potentiometer + fieldbus Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + motor potentiometer Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus Analog output connection

Dependency: Caution:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076 If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically: p2051[1] = r0063

Caution: Notice:

When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922. For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 = 999.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-123

Parameters Parameter list

p1000[0...n]
CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200 Factory setting 6 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the speed setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 6: 7: 10: 11: 12: 13: 16: 17: 20: 21: 22: 23: 26: 27: 30: 31: 32: 33: 36: 37: 60: 61: 62: 63: 66: 67: 70: 71: 72: 73: 76: 77: 200:

No main setpoint Motorized potentiometer Analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint Motor potentiometer + fieldbus Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2 Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2 Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + motor potentiometer Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2 Analog output connection

Dependency: Caution:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076 If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically: p2051[1] = r0063

1-124

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Caution: Notice:

When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922. For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 = 999.

p1000[0...n]
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200 Factory setting 2 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the speed setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 6: 7: 10: 11: 12: 13: 16: 17: 20: 21: 22: 23: 26: 27: 30: 31: 32: 33: 36: 37: 60: 61: 62: 63: 66: 67: 70: 71: 72: 73: 76: 77: 200:

No main setpoint Motorized potentiometer Analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint Motor potentiometer + fieldbus Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2 Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2 Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + motor potentiometer Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2 Analog output connection

Dependency:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-125

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically: p2051[1] = r0063

Caution: Notice:

When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active. The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922. For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 = 999.

p1001[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1002[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 2. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1003[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 3. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1004[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 4. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

1-126

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1005[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 5. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1006[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 6. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1007[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 7. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1008[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 8. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1009[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 9. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-127

Parameters Parameter list

p1010[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 10. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1011[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 11. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1012[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 12. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1013[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 13. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1014[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 14. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

1-128

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1015[0...n]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 15. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p1016

Fixed speed setpoint mode / n_setp_fixed mode


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Direct selection Selection binary coded Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Note:

Sets the mode to select the fixed speed setpoint. 1: 2:

Re p1016 = 1: In this mode, the fixed speed setpoint is entered using p1001 ... p1004. Re p1016 = 2: In this mode, the fixed speed setpoint is entered using p1001 ... p1015.

p1020[0...n]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197

Note:

If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1021[0...n]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197

Note:

If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-129

Parameters Parameter list

p1022[0...n]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197

Note:

If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1023[0...n]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint. Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197

Note:

If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1024

CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the selected and effective fixed speed setpoint. This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with the main setpoint).

Dependency:

Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023. Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197. Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1070, r1197

Note:

If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1025.0

BO: Fixed speed setpoint status / n_setp_fix status


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Fixed speed setpoint selected 1 signal Yes Factory setting 0 signal No FP Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status when selecting the fixed speed setpoints. Bit 00

1-130

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1016 Re bit 00: When the fixed speed setpoints are directly selected (p1016 = 1), this bit is set if at least 1 fixed speed setpoint is selected.

p1030[0...n]

Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Data save active Automatic mode, ramp-function generator active Initial rounding-off active Save in NVRAM active Ramp-function generator always active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0000 0110 bin 0 signal No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer. Bit 00 01 02 03 04

Notice:

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

Re bit 00: 0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040. 1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1. Re bit 01: 0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0). 1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode. For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active. Re bit 02: 0: Without initial rounding-off 1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows: r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2] The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time. Re bit 03: 0: Non-volatile data save de-activated. 1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1). Re bit 04: When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r1050.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-131

Parameters Parameter list

p1035[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.13 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description:

Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1035).

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1036 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1035[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1035).

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1036 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1036[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.14 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description:

Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1036).

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1035 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

1-132

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1036[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1036).

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1035 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1037[0...n]

Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer. This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase. The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).

p1038[0...n]

Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer. This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase. The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).

p1039[0...n]

BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer. Refer to: p1037, p1038 The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-133

Parameters Parameter list

p1040[0...n]

Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has been powered up. Only effective if p1030.0 = 0. Refer to: p1030

p1041[0...n]

BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer. In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the setpoint must be interconnected via a connector input.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042 The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.

p1042[0...n]

CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode. Refer to: p1041

p1043[0...n]

BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. Refer to: p1044 The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).

p1044[0...n]

CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. Refer to: p1043

1-134

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).

r1045

CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.

p1047[0...n]

Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has been activated).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082 When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.

p1048[0...n]

Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer. The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has been activated).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082 The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).

r1050

CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator / Mop setp after RFG
Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator. This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards (e.g. with the main setpoint).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1070 For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation, suppress pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-135

Parameters Parameter list

p1051[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2 PN

CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Min Description:

Max -

Factory setting 1083[0]

Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.

p1051[0...n]
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 9733[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.

p1052[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2 PN

CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Min Description:

Max -

Factory setting 1086[0]

Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.

p1052[0...n]
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 9733[1] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.

p1055[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 0 [1] 722.0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source for jog 1. Refer to: p0840, p1058 The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.

1-136

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.

p1055[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source for jog 1. Refer to: p0840, p1058 The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056. The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.

p1056[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 0 [1] 722.1 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source for jog 2. Refer to: p0840, p1059 The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056. The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.

p1056[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source for jog 2. Refer to: p0840, p1059 The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056. The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.

p1058[0...n]

Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 150.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved. Refer to: p1055, p1056

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-137

Parameters Parameter list

p1059[0...n]

Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting -150.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved. Refer to: p1055, p1056

p1063[0...n]

Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed limit/velocity limit effective in the setpoint channel. Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088

p1070[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2050[1] [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description:

Sets the signal source for the main setpoint. Examples: r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1070[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting [0] 755[0] [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the main setpoint. Examples: r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

1-138

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1071[0...n]

CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.

r1073

CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.

p1075[0...n]

CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint. Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078

p1076[0...n]

CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.

r1077

CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.

r1078

CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary setpoint.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-139

Parameters Parameter list

p1080[0...n]

Minimum speed / n_min


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 19500.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the lowest possible motor speed. This value is not undershot in operation. Refer to: p1106 The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106. The parameter value applies for both motor directions. In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).

p1082[0...n]

Maximum speed / n_max


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the highest possible speed. For vector control, the maximum speed is restricted to 60.0 / (8.333 x 500 s x r0313). This can be identified by a reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode p1300 can be changed over. If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). When using sine-wave filters (p0230 = 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency of the filter capacitance and the motor leakage inductance. For reactors and dU/dt filters, it is limited to 120 Hz / r0313. Refer to: p0230, r0313, p0322

Notice: Note:

After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. The parameter applies for both motor directions. The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer). Since the parameter is part of quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), it is defined appropriately when p0310, p0311, p0322, p0324, p0530, p0531, and p0532 are changed. The following limits are always effective for p1082: p1082 <= min(p0324, p0532) if p0324 > 0 and p0532 > 0 p1082 <= p0322 if p0324 = 0 or p0532 = 0 and p0322 > 0 p1082 <= 60 x maximum(15 x r0310, 650 Hz) / r0313 p1082 <= 60 x maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k x r0313), with k = 12 (vector control), k = 6.5 (U/f control) During automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0), the parameter value is assigned the maximum motor speed (p0322). If p0322 = 0, the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction motors, the synchronous no-load speed is used as the default value (p0310 x 60 / r0313). For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies: During automatic calculation (p0340, p3900), p1082 is limited to speeds where the EMF does not exceed the DC link voltage. p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the value is not changed.

1-140

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1083[0...n]

CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Notice:

Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction. A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

r1084

CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the effective positive speed limit. Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085

p1085[0...n]

CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1083[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.

p1086[0...n]

CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min -210000.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 0.000 [rpm] Factory setting -210000.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Notice:

Sets the speed limit for the negative direction. A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

r1087

CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the effective negative speed limit. Refer to: p1082, p1086, p1088

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-141

Parameters Parameter list

p1088[0...n]

CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1086[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.

p1091[0...n]

Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets skip speed 1. Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101 Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel. The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.

p1092[0...n]

Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets skip speed 2. Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101 Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.

p1093[0...n]

Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets skip speed 3. Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101 Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.

p1094[0...n]

Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets skip speed 4. Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101 Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.

1-142

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1101[0...n]

Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 0.000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4. Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094 The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101. Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is skipped. Example: p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20 --> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped. For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies: For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies: r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm] For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies: r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]

p1106[0...n]

CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_src


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source for lowest possible motor speed. Refer to: p1080 The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106.

p1108[0...n]

BI: Total setpoint selection / Total setp sel


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to select the total setpoint. The selection of the total speed setpoint is automatically interconnected to the status word of the technology controller (r2349.4) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0. Refer to: p1109 If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to withdraw the interconnection to its status word (r2349.4).

Caution:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-143

Parameters Parameter list

p1109[0...n]

CI: Total setpoint / Total setp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the total setpoint. For p1108 = 1 signal, the total setpoint is read in via p1109. The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller (r2294) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0. Refer to: p1108 If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to disable the interconnection to its output (r2294).

Caution:

p1110[0...n]

BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction. Refer to: p1111

p1111[0...n]

BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction. Refer to: p1110

r1112

CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set aft min_lim


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting. Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101

1-144

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1113[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.11 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint. Refer to: r1198 If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using p1113 when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to positive couplings in the control loop. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Notice:

p1113[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting [0] 722.1 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint. Refer to: r1198 If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using p1113 when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to positive couplings in the control loop. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Notice:

r1114

CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.

p1115

Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the ramp-function generator type.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-145

Parameters Parameter list

Value: Note:

0: 1:

Basic ramp-function generator Extended ramp-function generator

Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.

r1119

CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Notice: Note:

Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.

p1120[0...n]

Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed (p1082) in this time. Refer to: p1082, p1123 The ramp-up time can be scaled via connector input p1138. The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized. For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-up times of 0 s are not expedient. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

p1121[0...n]
PM230

Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 30.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill (setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1. The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit. Refer to: p1082, p1123 For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

Dependency: Note:

p1121[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 10.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill (setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1. Refer to: p1082, p1123

Dependency:

1-146

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

p1122[0...n]

BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Caution:

Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0). If the technology controller is operated in mode p2251 = 0 (technology controller as main speed setpoint), then it is not permissible to disable the interconnection to its status word (r2349).

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. In the case of sensorless vector control, the ramp-function generator must not be bypassed, other than indirectly by means of interconnection with r2349.

p1123[0...n]

Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time / RFG t_RU min


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the minimum ramp-up time. The ramp-up time (p1120) is limited internally to this minimum value. Refer to: p1082 The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor. If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1123 is re-calculated.

p1127[0...n]
PM230 PM250, PM260

Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the minimum ramp-down time. The ramp-down time (p1121) is limited internally to this minimum value. Refer to: p1082 For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor. If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1127 is recalculated.

p1127[0...n]
PM240

Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the minimum ramp-down time. The ramp-down time (p1121) is limited internally to this minimum value. Refer to: p1082

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-147

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor. If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1127 is recalculated. If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the minimum ramp-down time is automatically adapted using p1127.

p1130[0...n]
PM230

Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 2.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down. Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1130[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down. Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1131[0...n]
PM230

Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 2.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down. Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1131[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down. Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1134[0...n]

Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function generator. 0: 1: Cont. smoothing Discont smoothing

1-148

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s. p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing) If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up completed. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new setpoint. p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing) If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint. For the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.

p1135[0...n]
PM230

OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5400.000 [s] Factory setting 30.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command. The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit. This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.

p1135[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5400.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command. This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.

p1136[0...n]
PM230

OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 2.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

p1136[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

p1137[0...n]

OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 30.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-149

Parameters Parameter list

p1138[0...n]

CI: Up ramp scaling / Up ramp scaling


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for scaling the up ramp. Refer to: p1120 The ramp-up time is set in p1120.

p1139[0...n]

CI: Down ramp scaling / Down ramp scaling


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for scaling the down ramp. Refer to: p1121 The ramp-down time is set in p1121.

p1140[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.4 [1] 1 [2] 2090.4 [3] 2090.4

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4). BI: p1140 = 0 signal: Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero). BI: p1140 = 1 signal: Ramp-function generator enable.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: r0054, p1141, p1142 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

1-150

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1140[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4). BI: p1140 = 0 signal: Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero). BI: p1140 = 1 signal: Ramp-function generator enable.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: r0054, p1141, p1142 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1141[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.5 [1] 1 [2] 2090.5 [3] 2090.5

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5). BI: p1141 = 0 signal: Freezes the ramp-function generator. BI: p1141 = 1 signal: Continue ramp-function generator.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: r0054, p1140, p1142 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases: - OFF1/OFF3. - ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth. - ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-151

Parameters Parameter list

p1141[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5). BI: p1141 = 0 signal: Freezes the ramp-function generator. BI: p1141 = 1 signal: Continue ramp-function generator.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: r0054, p1140, p1142 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice:

The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases: - OFF1/OFF3. - ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth. - ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.

p1142[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.6 [1] 1 [2] 2090.6 [3] 2090.6

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6). BI: p1142 = 0 signal Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero). BI: p1142 = 1 signal Setpoint enable.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: p1140, p1141 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows as standard: BI: p1142 = 0 signal

1-152

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1142[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6). BI: p1142 = 0 signal Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero). BI: p1142 = 1 signal Setpoint enable.

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: p1140, p1141 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows as standard: BI: p1142 = 0 signal

p1143[0...n]

BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator. The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters. Refer to: p1144 0/1 signal: The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function generator. 1 signal: The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective. 1/0 signal: The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time. 0 signal: The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.

p1144[0...n]

CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value. The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters. Refer to: p1143

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-153

Parameters Parameter list

p1145[0...n]

Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 50.0 Factory setting 0.0 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the ramp-function generator tracking. The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.

Notice:

If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady acceleration. Remedy: - switch off ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0). - increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).

Note:

In the U/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.

p1148[0...n]

Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 1000.000 [rpm] Factory setting 19.800 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active). If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.

Dependency:

Refer to: r1199

r1149

CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 39_1 Min - [rev/s] Calculated: Scaling: p2007 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rev/s] Factory setting - [rev/s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator. Refer to: p1145

r1150

CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.

1-154

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1155[0...n]

CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller. The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6. The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller (r2294) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 1. Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170

Caution:

If the technology controller is activated, then it is not permissible to withdraw the parameter interconnection.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1160[0...n]

CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller. Refer to: p1155, r1170 For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective. The ramp-function generator is set (to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive corresponding to the ramp-down time (p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator, STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function generator).

r1169

CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160). Refer to: p1155, p1160 The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled).

r1170

CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160). Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-155

Parameters Parameter list

r1197

Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023 If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1198.0...15

CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Fixed setp bit 0 Fixed setp bit 1 Fixed setp bit 2 Fixed setp bit 3 Inhibit negative direction Inhibit positive direction Setpoint inversion Motorized potentiometer raise Motorized potentiometer lower Bypass ramp-function generator 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No FP 3010 3010 3010 3010 3040 3040 3040 3020 3020 3060, 3070 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the control word for the setpoint channel. Bit 00 01 02 03 05 06 11 13 14 15

r1199.0...8

CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Ramp-up active Ramp-down active RFG active Ramp-function generator set Ramp-function generator held Ramp-function generator tracking active Maximum limit active Ramp-function generator, acceleration positive Ramp-function generator, acceleration negative 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG). Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

Note:

Re bit 02: The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.

1-156

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1200[0...n]

Flying restart operating mode / FlyRest op_mode


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the operating mode for flying restart. The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.

Value:

0: 1: 4:

Flying restart inactive Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction) Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)

Dependency:

A differentiation is made between flying restart for U/f control and for vector control (p1300). Flying restart, U/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204 Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205 For synchronous motors, flying restart cannot be activated. Refer to: p1201 Refer to: F07330, F07331

Notice: Note:

The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent. When p1200 = 1, 4: Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3. When p1200 = 1: The search is made in both directions. When p1200 = 4: The search is only made in the setpoint direction. For U/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies: The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is assumed that the motor is at a standstill. If p1200 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).

p1201[0...n]

BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function. Refer to: p1200 Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.

p1202[0...n]
PM230

Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400 [%] Factory setting 90 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function. The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current. Refer to: r0331

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-157

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.

Note:

In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the frequency on the basis of voltage inputs. Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very high, for example).

p1202[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function. The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current. Refer to: r0331 An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.

Note:

In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the frequency on the basis of voltage inputs. Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very high, for example).

p1203[0...n]
PM230

Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4000 [%] Factory setting 150 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the factor for the search speed for flying restart. The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value results in a longer search time.

Caution:

An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion. For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.

Note:

The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart). With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).

p1203[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the factor for the search speed for flying restart. The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value results in a longer search time.

1-158

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion. For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.

Note:

The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart). With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).

r1204.0...13

CO/BO: Flying restart, U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Current impressed No current flow Voltage input Voltage reduced Start ramp-function generator Wait for execution Slope filter act Positive gradient Current < thresh Current minimum Search in the positive direction Stop after positive direction Stop after negative direction No result 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the U/f control mode. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13

r1205.0...15

CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Speed adaptation circuit record angle Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Isd channel enable Speed control switched out Quadrature arm switched in Special transformation active Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0 Current control on Isd_set = 0 A Frequency held Search in the positive direction Search Started Current impressed Search interrupted Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Speed control activated 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-159

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Re bit 00 ... 09: Used to control internal sequences during the flying restart. Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs. Re bits 10 ... 15: Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.

p1206[0...9]

Faults without automatic restart / F w/out auto AR


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets faults for which automatic restart should not be effective. The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16. Refer to: p1210

p1210

Automatic restart, mode / AR mode


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 26 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the automatic restart mode (AR). The parameters must be saved in the non-volatile memory p0971 = 1 in order that the setting becomes effective. 0: 1: 4: 6: 14: 16: 26: Inhibit automatic restart Acknowledge all faults without restarting Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts Restart after fault with additional start attempts Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment Acknowledging all faults and reclosing for an ON command

Dependency:

The automatic restart requires an active ON command (e.g., via a digital input). If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted. When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start. For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgement is required for an automatic restart. Refer to: p0840, p0857 Refer to: F30003

Danger:

If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is present again. This automatic power-up sequence can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON command. A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed. For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started. Re p1210 = 1: Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowledgment attempts. Re p1210 = 4: An automatic restart is only performed if fault F30003 has occurred on the power unit. If additional faults are present, then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure. Re p1210 = 6: An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred.

Caution:

Note:

1-160

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Re p1210 = 14: As for p1210 = 4. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged. Re p1210 = 16: As for p1210 = 6. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged. Re p1210 = 26: The same as for p1210 = 6. For this mode, the switch-on command can be entered with a delay. To restart after the line supply returns or after acknowledging faults, the switch-on command must be set within the monitoring time (p1213[0]), otherwise fault F07320 will be output. The restart is interrupted with either OFF2 or OFF3.

p1211

Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10 Factory setting 3 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Caution: Notice:

Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, 26. Refer to: p1210, r1214 Refer to: F07320 A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the automatic restart function is re-activated. After a complete power failure the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the power failure, and decrements this start attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic restart function prior to power failure, e.g. when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212 / 2, the fault counter will already have been decremented once. In this case, the start counter is thus decreased by the value 2.

Note:

A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the motor was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired. As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning. Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached. After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start attempts is again available. At least one start attempt is always carried out. After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented. For p1210 = 26, the start counter is decremented if after a successful fault acknowledgement, the on command is present.

p1212

Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.1 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 1.0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time up to restart. This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6, 26. For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no restart. Refer to: p1210, r1214

Caution:

A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-161

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the delay time has expired and the full delay time. If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in the delay time.

p1213[0...1]

Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [s] Factory setting [0] 60.0 [s] [1] 0.0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency: Caution: Notice: Note:

Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR). [0] = Restart [1] = Reset start counter Refer to: p1210, r1214 A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the automatic restart function is re-activated. Index 0: The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again (flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output. The monitoring is de-activated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart. The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present). In the case of p1210 = 14, 16, the faults which are present must be acknowledged manually within the time in p1213[0]. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time. Index 1: The start counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in p1213[1] has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart (p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control Unit boots. The start counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault is acknowledged. The start counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed. For p1210 = 26, the fault must have been successfully acknowledged and the switch-on command issued within the time in p1213[0]. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.

r1214.0...15

CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Initialization Wait for alarm Auto restart act Setting the acknowledgement command Acknowledge alarms Restart Delay time running after automatic powerup Fault 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR). Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

1-162

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

10 12 13 14 15 Note:

Effective fault Start count. bit 0 Start count. bit 1 Start count. bit 2 Start count. bit 3

Yes ON ON ON ON

No OFF OFF OFF OFF

Re bit 00: State to display the single initialization after POWER ON. Re bit 01: State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state). Re bit 02: General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated. Re bit 03: Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the acknowledge command is continually displayed. Re bit 04: State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowledgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1). Re bit 05: State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6). Re bit 06: State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the magnetizing process). For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged. Re bit 07: State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowledging the fault and withdrawing the power-on command. Re bit 10: When the automatic restart function is active, r1214 bit 7 is displayed, otherwise the effective fault r2139 bit 3. Re bits 12 ... 15: Actual state of the start counter (binary coded). In addition to bit 04: For p1210 = 26, the system waits in this state until the switch-on command is available.

p1215
PM230

Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 No motor holding brake available Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency: Caution: Notice:

Sets the holding brake configuration. 0: 3:

Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228 For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake. If p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using a 1 signal at p0855. if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal. The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.

Note:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-163

Parameters Parameter list

p1215
PM240 PM250, PM260

Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 No motor holding brake available Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control Motor holding brake always open Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the holding brake configuration. 0: 1: 2: 3:

Dependency: Caution: Notice:

Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228 For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake. If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using a 1 signal at p0855. If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3. if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal. The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.

Note:

p1216

Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the time to open the motor holding brake. After the holding brake has been controlled (opened), the speed setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the speed setpoint is enabled.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1215, p1217 For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and integrated brake, for p0300 = 10000, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in the motor.

p1217

Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake. After OFF1 or OFF3 and the controlling (closing) of the holding brake, the drive remains stationary under closedloop control for this time with a speed setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the time expires.

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1215, p1216 If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag. If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.

Note:

For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and integrated brake, for p0300 = 10000, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in the motor.

1-164

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1226[0...n]

Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 20.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification. Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring. When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1227 Standstill is identified in the following cases: - the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired. - the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired. The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed threshold is too low.

p1227

Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.000 [s] Factory setting 300.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification. When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145).

Dependency: Notice:

The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit. Refer to: p1226 For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not suppressed. Standstill is identified in the following cases: - the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired. - the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired. For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies: Monitoring is de-activated. For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies: With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts" down. Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.

Note:

p1228

Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 299.000 [s] Factory setting 0.010 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-165

Parameters Parameter list

After OFF1 or OFF3, the pulses are canceled, if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - the speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired. - the speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired. Dependency: Notice: Refer to: p1226, p1227 When the motor holding brake is activated, pulse cancellation is additionally delayed by the brake closing time (p1217).

p1230[0...n]

BI: DC braking activation / DC brake act


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to activate DC braking. Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239 1 signal: DC braking activated. 0 signal: DC braking de-activated.

p1231[0...n]

DC braking configuration / DCBRK config


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 14 No function DC braking DC braking for OFF1/OFF3 DC braking below starting speed Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description: Value:

Setting to activate DC braking. 0: 4: 5: 14:

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0300, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239 Re p1231 = 4: The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled. - the function can be superseded by an OFF2 response. Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled): - binector input p1230 = 1 signal (DC braking activation). - the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in "S5x" (refer to function diagram 2610). - the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0). The function can only be used for induction motors (p0300 = 1). DC braking can only be withdrawn (p1231 = 0) if it is not being used as a fault response in p2101. Re p1231 = 5: DC braking can only be set for induction motors. DC braking is activated if the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present. Binector input p1230 is ineffective. If the drive speed still lies above the speed threshold p1234, then initially, the drive is ramped-down to this threshold, demagnetized (see p0347) and is then switched into DC braking for the time set in p1233. After this, the drive is switchedoff. If, at OFF1, the drive speed is below p1234, then it is immediately demagnetized and switched into DC braking. A change is made into normal operation if the OFF1 command is withdrawn prematurely. Flying restart must be activated if the motor is still rotating. DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible. Re p1231 = 14: In addition to the function for p1231 = 5, binector input p1230 is evaluated. DC braking is only automatically activated when the speed threshold p1234 is fallen below if binector input p1230 = 1 signal.

1-166

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Notice: This is also the case, if no OFF command is present. After demagnetization and after the time in p1233 has expired, the drive changes back into normal operation or is switched-off (for OFF1/OFF3). If a 0 signal is applied to binector input p1230, for OFF1 and OFF3 no DC braking is executed. Note: DCBRK: DC Braking

p1232[0...n]

DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the braking current for DC braking. Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346 A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that DC braking is switched on. The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640). The braking current is internally limited to r0067. For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.

p1233[0...n]

DC braking time / DCBRK time


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3600.0 [s] Factory setting 1.0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Sets the DC braking time (as fault response). Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239

p1234[0...n]

Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Sets the starting speed for DC braking. If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated. Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239

r1239.8...13

CO/BO: DC braking status word / DCBRK ZSW


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name DC braking active DC braking ready DC braking selected 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No FP 7017 7017 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Status word of the DC braking. Bit 08 10 11

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-167

Parameters Parameter list

12 13 Dependency: Note:

DC braking selection internally inhibited DC braking for OFF1/OFF3

Yes Yes

No No

Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234 Re bit 12, 13: Only effective for p1231 = 14.

p1240[0...n]
PM230

Vdc controller configuration (vector control) / Vdc_ctr config vec


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode. For U/f control: see p1280. 0: 1: 3: Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_max controller enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p1245 Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406 An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive. p1240 = 1, 3: When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies: - the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum DC link voltage when braking. - the ramp-down times are automatically increased. If overvoltage faults occur in spite of the Vdc_max controller being active, the ramp-down time in p1121 might need to be increased. - set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible in line with the supply voltage (in so doing avoid A07401). p1240 = 3: When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies: - the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum DC link voltage when accelerating. - the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link. - the Vdc_min controller cannot be used when the line voltage is permanently below 380 V (if required, p1247 should be reduced).

p1240[0...n]
PM240

Vdc controller configuration (vector control) / Vdc_ctr config vec


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode. For U/f control: see p1280. 0: 1: 2: 3: Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_max controller enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p1245 Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406 An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive. p1240 = 1, 3: When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies: - the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum DC link voltage when braking.

1-168

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

- the ramp-down times are automatically increased. p1240 = 2, 3: When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies: - the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum DC link voltage when accelerating. - the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link. If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the Vdc_max control is automatically deactivated.

r1242
PM230 PM240

Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies: r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage) PM230: r1242 is limited to Vdc_max - 50.0 V. If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies: r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit) r1242 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units)

Note:

The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1242 and the controller output is zero.

p1243[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller). 100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251, p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.

p1245[0...n]
PM230

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 65 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150 [%] Factory setting 73 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). The value is obtained as follows: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210

Dependency: Warning:

Refer to: p0210 An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-169

Parameters Parameter list

p1245[0...n]
PM240

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 65 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150 [%] Factory setting 76 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). The value is obtained as follows: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210

Dependency: Warning:

Refer to: p0210 An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation.

r1246
PM230 PM240

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and the controller output is zero.

p1247[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 300 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). 100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251, p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.

p1249[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 10.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.

Note:

For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.

1-170

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1250[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 1.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor) and the DC link capacitance of the power unit.

p1251[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor). p1251 = 0: The integral component is de-activated.

p1252[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).

p1254
PM230

Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Automatic detection inhibited Automatic detection enabled Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. 0: 1:

p1254
PM240

Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Automatic detection inhibited Automatic detection enabled Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. 0: 1:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-171

Parameters Parameter list

p1255[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1800.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized. Prerequisite: p1256 = 1

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: F07406 If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.

p1256[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405 Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value: Dependency:

Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). 0: 1:

Refer to: F07405, F07406

p1257[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 50.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .

r1258
PM230 PM240

CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller) The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.

p1280[0...n]
PM230

Vdc controller configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode.

1-172

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Value: Note:

0: 1:

Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_max controller enable

For high input voltages (see p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max controller: - Set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible (in so doing avoid A07401). - Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). - Increase the ramp-down times (p1121). - Reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291) (factor 0.5). - Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810 bit 1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the controller (p1292) (factor 0.5). In this case, we generally recommend to use vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240).

p1280[0...n]
PM240

Vdc controller configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Inhib Vdc ctrl Vdc_max controller enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode. 0: 1: 2: 3:

Note:

For high input voltages (see p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max controller: - Set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible (in so doing avoid A07401). - Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). - Increase the ramp-down times (p1121). - Reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291) (factor 0.5). - Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810 bit 1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the controller (p1292) (factor 0.5). In this case, we generally recommend to use vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240). The following measures are suitable to improve the Vdc_min controller: - Optimize the Vdc_min controller (see p1287). - Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810 bit 1 = 1). If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the Vdc_max control is automatically deactivated.

r1282
PM230 PM240

Vdc_max controller switch-in level (U/f) / Vdc_max on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies: r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage) If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies: r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit) r1282 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units)

Note:

The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1282 and the controller output is zero.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-173

Parameters Parameter list

p1283[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller). 100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291, and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.

p1285[0...n]
PM240

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 65 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150 [%] Factory setting 76 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). The value is obtained as follows: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210

Warning:

An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation.

r1286
PM240

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1286 and the controller output is zero.

p1287[0...n]
PM240

Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). 100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization. If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291, and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.

1-174

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1288[0...n]

Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG
Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.000 Factory setting 0.500 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal of the Vdc_max controller. For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally.

p1290[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 1.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller). The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is pre-set to a value that is optimally adapted to the capacitance of the power unit.

p1291[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 40 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).

p1292[0...n]
PM230 PM240

Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 10 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).

p1293[0...n]
PM240

Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600.00 [Hz] Factory setting 600.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-175

Parameters Parameter list

p1294
PM230 PM240

Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (U/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing function is de-activated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the parameterized connection voltage p0210. 0: 1: Automatic detection inhibited Automatic detection enabled

Value:

p1295[0...n]
PM240

Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized. Prerequisite: p1296 = 1. If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.

Notice:

p1296[0...n]
PM240

Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405 Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value: Note:

Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). 0: 1:

Re p1296 = 1: The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is triggered.

p1297[0...n]
PM240

Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 50.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .

1-176

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1298
PM230 PM240

CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)

p1300[0...n]

Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 22 U/f control with linear characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC U/f control with parabolic characteristic U/f control with parameterizable characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO U/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles) U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO U/f control with independent voltage setpoint Speed control (encoderless) Torque control (encoderless) Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 19: 20: 22:

Dependency:

Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311). Operation with a U/f characteristic is not supported for 1LE4 synchronous motors. Refer to: p0300, p0311, p0500, p1501

Notice:

Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%). The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.

Note:

Only by selecting closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) is it possible to change over in operation to closed-loop torque control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set precisely. The Imax voltage controller remains active. During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over drive data sets.

p1310[0...n]

Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 250.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305). The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor frequency, the rated motor voltage is present.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-177

Parameters Parameter list

The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows: Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 x p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310 (permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 % At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following: - magnetize the induction motor. - hold the load. - compensate for losses in the system. This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310. The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law U/f characteristics. Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost. For vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automatically sets the optimum operating conditions. Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315 Notice: Note: The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed). The voltage boost is only effective for U/f control (p1300). The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)). However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312

p1311[0...n]

Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 250.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the load. The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed. The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows: Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1311 (voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %

Dependency: Notice: Note:

The current limit p0640 limits the boost. Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315 The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase. The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes. Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310

p1312[0...n]

Voltage boost when starting / U_boost starting


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 250.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Setting for an additional voltage boost when powering-up, however, only for the first acceleration phase. The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

The current limit p0640 limits the boost. Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315 The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase. The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes. Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310

1-178

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1315

Voltage boost total / U_boost total


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt. r1315 = p1310 + p1311 + p1312 Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1312

p1320[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic. Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

Note:

Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

p1321[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic. Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327 Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

p1322[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic. The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-179

Parameters Parameter list

p1323[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1324[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic. The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1325[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327

p1326[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic. Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. The following applies for the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326 Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1327

Note:

Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output frequencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

1-180

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1327[0...n]

U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310. This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic. Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326 Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

p1330[0...n]

CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for U/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19). Selects the U/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19. Refer to: p1300

p1333[0...n]

U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Warning:

Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated. The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6). An excessively low value can result in instability.

Note:

For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.

p1334[0...n]

U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation. For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-181

Parameters Parameter list

p1335[0...n]

Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip). p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation de-activated. p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.

Dependency:

Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360). If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335. For U/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee correct operation.

Note:

The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors. For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in order to be able to precisely set the output frequency. If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).

p1336[0...n]

Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600.00 [%] Factory setting 250.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).

r1337

CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip). p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active. Refer to: p1335

p1338[0...n]

U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 0.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the gain for resonance damping for U/f control. Refer to: p1300, p1339, p1349 The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load conditions.

1-182

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The resonance damping is active in a range from approximately 6 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310). The shutoff frequency is determined by p1349. For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in order that the output frequency can be precisely set.

p1339[0...n]

U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1.00 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 20.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for U/f control. Refer to: p1300, p1338, p1349

p1340[0...n]

I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 0.500 Factory setting 0.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the proportional gain of the I_max frequency controller. The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded. In the U/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency and one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is accelerated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).

Dependency: Notice:

In the U/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller is used. When de-activating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed: When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced, however, overcurrent alarm messages are generated. The drive is shut down if the overcurrent limit (r0209) is exceeded.

Note:

The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is de-activated with p1122 = 1. p1341 = 0: I_max frequency controller de-activated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed range.

p1341[0...n]

I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 50.000 [s] Factory setting 0.300 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller. Refer to: p1340 When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is de-activated and only the current limiting controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346). In the case of power units with regenerative feedback (PM250, PM260), current limitation control for a regenerative load is always implemented by influencing the frequency. This current limiting function is de-activated with p1340 = p1341 = 0.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-183

Parameters Parameter list

r1343

CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the effective frequency limit. Refer to: p1340

r1344

I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl U_outp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced. Refer to: p1340

p1345[0...n]

I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.000 Factory setting 0.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller. Refer to: p1340 The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).

p1346[0...n]

I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 50.000 [s] Factory setting 0.030 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller. Refer to: p1340 The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232). For p1346 = 0, the following applies: The integral time of the I_max voltage controller is de-activated.

r1348

CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v
Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the economic factor determined for optimizing motor consumption. Refer to: p1335 The value is only determined for operating modes with Economic (p1300 = 4, 7).

1-184

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1349[0...n]

U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [Hz] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3000.00 [Hz] Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for U/f control. Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency. Refer to: p1338, p1339 For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max. of 45 Hz.

p1350[0...n]

Soft starting / Soft starting


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value: Note:

Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it jumps directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off). 0: 1: OFF ON

The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages: 0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost) Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized 1 = on (voltage is continually established) Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later

p1351[0...n]

CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -300.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 300.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake. When setting p1351 > 0, then slip compensation is automatically activated (p1335 = 100 %). Refer to: p1352 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. Connected with p1352 a value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330).

p1352[0...n]

CI: Motor holding brake starting frequency signal source / Brake f_start
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1351[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake. Refer to: p1216

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-185

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

A value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330). The setting of the starting frequency begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056.4) and ends once the brake opening time (p1216) has elapsed and the starting frequency (p1334) has been reached. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take place.

p1400[0...n]

Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Sensorless vector control freeze I comp Kp/Tn adaptation active Free Tn adaptation active Torque pre-control Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Always active Yes Factory setting 1000 0000 0010 0001 bin 0 signal No No No No For n_ctrl enab No FP 6040 6040 6040 6050 6060 6030 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control. Bit 00 01 05 06 14 15

Note:

Re bit 01: When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled mode.

p1401[0...n]

Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Flux setpoint soft starting active Flux setpoint differentiation active Flux build-up control active Quick magnetizing Pre-control speed limitation 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0000 0110 bin 0 signal No No No No No FP 6722 6723 6722, 6723 6722 6640 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control Bit 00 01 02 06 07

Note:

Re bit 00 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors): Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. Re bit 01 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors): Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected, soft starting is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed. The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint (r0075) when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations because then, the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds. Re bit 02 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors): The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected and when flux build-up control is de-energized alarm A07416 is displayed. Re bit 06 (not for induction motors): Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see p0621) quick magnetizing is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a rotating motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place.

1-186

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Re bit 07: if the speed of the drive exceeds the effective speed limit of the speed limiting controller, the torque limit is reduced linearly to zero as the deviation becomes greater. This reduces the integral component of the speed controller and, in turn, the overshoot during load shedding (see also F07901 and p2162).

p1402[0...n]

Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Current controller adaptation active 1 signal Yes Factory setting 0000 bin 0 signal No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model. Bit 02

r1406.4...15

CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Hold speed controller I component Set speed controller I component Droop enable Torque control active Set speed adaptation controller I component 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No FP 6040 6040 6030 6060 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the control word of the speed controller. Bit 04 05 11 12 15

r1407.0...17

CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name U/f control active Encoderless operation active Torque control active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No FP 6030, 6060, 8010 6040 6040 6040 6060 6060 6060 6030 6030 6060 6640 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word of the speed controller. Bit 00 01 02

03 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 17

Speed control active Speed controller I component frozen Speed controller I component set Torque limit reached Upper torque limit active Lower torque limit active Droop enabled Speed setpoint limited Ramp-function generator set Encoderless operation due to a fault I/f control active Torque limit reached (without pre-control) Speed limiting control active

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-187

Parameters Parameter list

r1408.0...14

CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Current ctrl act Id control, I component limiting Voltage limiting Speed adaptation, limiting Motor stalled Separately excited synchronous motor is excited Current model FEM: magnetizing excitation current limited to 0 1 signal Active Active Active Active Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal Not active Not active Not active Not active No No No FP 6714 6714 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the current controller status word. Bit 00 01 03 10 12 13 14

p1416[0...n]

Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).

r1438

CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller. For U/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance. Refer to: r1439 In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

r1439

Speed setpoint, I component / n_set I_comp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the speed setpoint for the I component of the speed controller (output of the reference model after the setpoint limiting). Refer to: r1438 In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

1-188

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1444

Speed controller, speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the sum of all speed setpoints that are present. The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint: - setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119). - speed setpoint 1 (p1155). - speed setpoint 2 (p1160). - speed setpoint for the speed pre-control (p1430). - setpoint from DSC (for DSC active). - setpoint via PC (for master control active).

Dependency:

Refer to: r1119, p1155, p1160

r1445

CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual smoothed actual speed for speed control.

p1452[0...n]

Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC
Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 32000.00 [ms] Factory setting 10.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control. The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).

r1454

CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the system deviation of the I component of the speed controller.

p1455[0...n]

CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctr adapt_sig Kp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed controller. Refer to: p1456, p1457, p1458, p1459

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-189

Parameters Parameter list

p1456[0...n]

Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller. The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal. Refer to: p1455, p1457, p1458, p1459 If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

Dependency: Note:

p1457[0...n]

Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller. The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal. Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1458, p1459 If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

Dependency: Note:

p1458[0...n]

Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity controller. Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1459 If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

p1459[0...n]

Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity controller. Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1458 If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.

1-190

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1461[0...n]

Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctr Kp n up scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1470).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1464, p1465 If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1463[0...n]

Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctr Tn n up scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1472).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1464, p1465 If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1464[0...n]

Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective below this speed. Refer to: p1461, p1463, p1465 If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1465[0...n]

Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective above this speed. For P gain, p1470 x p1461 is effective. For the integral time, p1472 x p1463 is effective.

Dependency:

Refer to: p1461, p1463, p1464

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-191

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

p1466[0...n]

CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed controller. This also makes the effective P gain (including adaptations) scalable.

r1468

CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.

r1469

Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctr Tn eff


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller.

p1470[0...n]

Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 999999.000 Factory setting 0.300 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller. The product p0341 x p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3, 4).

p1472[0...n]

Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.0 [ms] Factory setting 20.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller. The integral component is stopped if the complete controller output or the sum of controller output and torque precontrol reach the torque limit.

1-192

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1475[0...n]

CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for the torque setting value when starting up with motor holding brake. The switching in of the torque setting value for the motor holding brake has a higher priority than the setting of the integrator value using p1477 and p1478. The setting of the integral output of the speed controller begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056 bit 4) and ends at the end of the brake control opening time p1216. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take place. If p1351 is used as a signal source for the torque setting value, the percentage value is interpreted in relation to the rated torque (p2003).

p1476[0...n]

BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller.

p1477[0...n]

BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the signal source to set the integrator setting value (p1478). Refer to: p1478, p1479 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1478[0...n]

CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the velocity controller. The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477. The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479. If p1478 is interconnected to the integral output of the speed controller (r1482), then after the magnetizing time (r0346) and if the speed controller is enabled, the integral component of the controller is set to the last value before the pulse inhibit. This value is set if no setting command (p1477) is interconnected or, at the instant that the pulses were inhibited, a setting command is available, which is not de-activated up to the next time that the pulses are inhibited. For sensorless vector control, in addition p1400.1 should be set to 1 so that when the drive is stopped, the integral component of the speed controller is not controlled down to zero. In order that when setting the integrator output, only the static torque is detected, we recommend that the accelerating torque is completely pre-controlled (e.g. p1496). If p1478 is interconnected to another output other than r1482, then after magnetizing and speed controller enable, the integral output is set once if the setting command is not interconnected (p1477 = 0).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-193

Parameters Parameter list

Refer to: p1477, p1479 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1479[0...n]

CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller. Refer to: p1477, p1478

r1482

CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_output


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller.

p1486[0...n]

CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the compensation torque to be output within the droop calculation. p1486 should be connected with the torque setpoint (corresponding to the selection p1488) of the drive, with which load equalization should take place.

p1487[0...n]

Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -2000.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation.

p1488[0...n]

Droop input source / Droop input source


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the source for droop feedback. With increasing torque, the speed setpoint is reduced (enabled using p1492), so that for mechanically coupled drives a load equalization (load compensation) is obtained. A load difference compensation is also possible, if p1486 is connected with the torque setpoint of the other drive.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3:

Droop feedback not connected Droop from torque setpoint Droop from speed controller output Droop from integral output, speed controller

1-194

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Caution:

Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1489, r1490, p1492 For active acceleration precontrol of the speed controller (refer to p1496), it is not recommended that p1488 is set to 1, as this could result in positive coupling effects. Instead of this, as source of the droop feedback, the output signal of the speed controller should be used, which generally sets the load torque.

p1489[0...n]

Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 0.500 Factory setting 0.050 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the scaling for the droop feedback Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, r1490, p1492 Example: A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %.

r1490

CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint when activated (p1492). Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, p1492

p1492[0...n]

BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint. Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, r1490 Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive.

r1493

CO: Moment of inertia, total / M_inertia total


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 25_1 Min - [kgm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max - [kgm] Factory setting - [kgm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the parameterized total moment of inertia ((p0341 * p0342) * p1496).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-195

Parameters Parameter list

p1496[0...n]

Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_prectrl scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Warning:

Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller. Refer to: p0341, p0342 The acceleration precontrol r1518 is kept at the old value if the ramp-function generator tracking (r1199.5) is active or the ramp-function generator output is set (r1199.3). This is used to avoid torque peaks. Depending on the application, it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0) or the acceleration precontrol (p1496 = 0). The acceleration precontrol is set to zero, if the Vdc control is active (r0056.14/15). The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960). The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint) and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled. We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.

Note:

p1499[0...n]

Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for encoderless torque control). Refer to: p0341, p0342

p1500[0...n]
CU240B-2

Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 66 Factory setting 2 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the torque setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 2: 6: 20: 22: 26: 60: 62: 66:

No main setpoint Analog setpoint Fieldbus Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus

Dependency:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1503, p1511

1-196

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1500[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP

Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 66 Factory setting 6 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the torque setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 2: 6: 20: 22: 26: 60: 62: 66:

No main setpoint Analog setpoint Fieldbus Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus

Dependency: Caution:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1503, p1511 When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1500[0...n]
CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 77 Factory setting 6 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the torque setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 2: 6: 7: 20: 22: 26: 27: 60:

No main setpoint Analog setpoint Fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2 Fieldbus + no main setpoint

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-197

Parameters Parameter list

62: 66: 67: 70: 72: 76: 77: Dependency: Caution:

Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1503, p1511 When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1500[0...n]
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 77 Factory setting 2 Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the source for the torque setpoint. For single-digit values, the following applies: The value specifies the main setpoint. For double-digit values, the following applies: The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint. Example: Value = 26 --> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint. --> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.

Value:

0: 2: 6: 7: 20: 22: 26: 27: 60: 62: 66: 67: 70: 72: 76: 77:

No main setpoint Analog setpoint Fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint + no main setpoint Analog setpoint + analog setpoint Analog setpoint + fieldbus Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2 Fieldbus + no main setpoint Fieldbus + analog setpoint Fieldbus+fieldbus Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2

Dependency: Caution:

When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced: Refer to: p1503, p1511 When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.

p1501[0...n]

BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control. The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513. Refer to: p1300

1-198

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

If the closed-loop torque control is not activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control (p1501), OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227). The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. 0 signal: Closed-loop speed control 1 signal: Closed-loop torque control

Notice: Note:

p1503[0...n]

CI: Torque setpoint / M_set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Note:

Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control. A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selection was made using the changeover source in p1501. it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501.

r1508

CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque. For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control, r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503.

p1511[0...n]

CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 1.

p1512[0...n]

CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary torque 1.

p1513[0...n]

CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 2.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-199

Parameters Parameter list

p1514[0...n]

Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -2000.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2.

r1515

Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the total supplementary torque. The displayed value is the total of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1511, p1512, p1513, p1514).

r1516

CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the total supplementary torque and the accelerating torque. The displayed value is the total of the smoothed supplementary torque and the accelerating torque (p1516 = p1518[1] + r1515).

p1517[0...n]

Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 [ms] Factory setting 4.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque. The acceleration pre-control is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value.

r1518[0...1]

CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency:

Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller. [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496

1-200

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1520[0...n]

CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min -1000000.00 [Nm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Danger:

Sets the fixed, upper torque limit. Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539 Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion.

Notice: Note:

A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).

p1521[0...n]

CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min -20000000.00 [Nm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max 1000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Danger:

Sets the fixed, lower torque limit. Refer to: p1520, p1522, p1523 Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion.

Notice: Note:

A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).

p1522[0...n]

CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1520[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Danger:

Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit. Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523 Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner.

p1523[0...n]

CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1521[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit. Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-201

Parameters Parameter list

Danger:

Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner.

p1524[0...n]

CO: Torque limit upper/motoring scaling / M_max up/mot scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -2000.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit or the torque limit when motoring. p1400.4 = 0: upper/lower p1400.4 = 1: motoring / regenerating A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. This parameter can be freely interconnected. The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.

p1525[0...n]

CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -2000.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 2000.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit. A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. This parameter can be freely interconnected. The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.

r1526

CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset. Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

r1527

CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset. Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

1-202

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1528[0...n]

CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1524[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Danger:

Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522. For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1529[0...n]

CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1525[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Danger:

Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523. For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies: Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner.

Notice:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

p1530[0...n]

Power limit motoring / P_max mot


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 14_5 Min 0.00 [kW] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 100000.00 [kW] Factory setting 0.00 [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the power limit when motoring. Refer to: p0500, p1531 The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.

p1531[0...n]

Power limit regenerative / P_max gen


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 14_5 Min -100000.00 [kW] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max -0.01 [kW] Factory setting -0.01 [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the regenerative power limit. Refer to: r0206, p0500, p1530 The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power. For power units without energy recovery capability, the regenerative power limit is preset to 30 % of the power r0206[0]. For a braking resistor connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), the power limit when generating is automatically adapted. For power units with energy recovery, the parameter is limited to the negative value of r0206[2].

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-203

Parameters Parameter list

r1533

Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.

r1536[0...1]

Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component. Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller. [0] = Limited [1] = Unlimited

r1537[0...1]

Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component. Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller. [0] = Limited [1] = Unlimited

r1538

CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the currently effective upper torque limit. The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased. This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960). The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

r1539

CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the currently effective lower torque limit. The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.

1-204

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960). The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

r1547[0...1]

CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 7_1 Min - [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Nm] Factory setting - [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output. [0] = Upper limit [1] = Lower limit

r1548[0...1]

CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the power unit as well as the parameterization in p0640. [0] = Upper limit [1] = Lower limit

p1552[0...n]

CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into account the current and power limits.

p1554[0...n]

CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into account the current and power limits.

p1570[0...n]

CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 50.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux. A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-205

Parameters Parameter list

p1573[0...n]

Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 100.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the flux threshold value for enabling the speed setpoint and the end of magnetizing (r0056.4). The parameter only has an influence if the flux actual value reaches the threshold value p1573 more quickly during magnetizing than the time set in p0346. The parameter has no influence for flying restart (see p1200) and after DC braking (see p1231).

p1574[0...n]
PM230

Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 5_1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 150.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 2.0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets a dynamic voltage reserve. Refer to: p0500 In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve. Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).

p1574[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 5_1 Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 150.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 10.0 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets a dynamic voltage reserve. Refer to: p0500 In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve. Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).

p1580[0...n]
PM230

Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100 [%] Factory setting 80 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load. For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.

Note:

It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low. In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce Kp). Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.

1-206

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1580[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100 [%] Factory setting 0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load. For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.

Note:

It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low. In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce Kp). Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.

p1582[0...n]

Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 4 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5000 [ms] Factory setting 15 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.

r1583

Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

p1584[0...n]

Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed

r1589

Field-weakening current, pre-control value / I_FieldWeak prectr


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-207

Parameters Parameter list

r1593[0...1]

CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor). [0] = PI output [1] = I output

p1594[0...n]

Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 Factory setting 0.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller.

p1596[0...n]

Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 300 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.

r1597

CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the output of the field weakening controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

r1598

CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

1-208

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1610[0...n]

Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -200.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the static torque setpoint for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333). For sensorless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610 represents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.

Notice: Note:

p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur. For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing current). For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque. Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous motors.

p1611[0...n]

Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 30.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333). When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appropriate current setpoint and controlled. For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496).

r1614

EMF maximum / EMF max


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the actual maximum possible electromotive force (EMF) of the separately-excited synchronous motor. The value is the basis for the flux setpoint. The maximum possible EMF depends on the following factors: - Actual DC link voltage (r0070). - Maximum modulation depth (p1803). - Field-generating and torque-generating current setpoint.

p1616[0...n]

Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 4 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 40 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the smoothing time for the current setpoint. The current setpoint is generated from p1610 and p1611. This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for sensorless vector control.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-209

Parameters Parameter list

r1623[0...1]

Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set). Re index 1: Reserved.

r1624

Field-generating current setpoint, total / Id_setp total


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 6_2 Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set). This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.

p1654[0...n]

Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.1 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 50.0 [ms] Factory setting 4.8 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components. The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.

p1702[0...n]

Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 70.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the flux-generating current component Isd. The parameter is effective for permanent-magnet synchronous motors.

p1703[0...n]

Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 60.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.

1-210

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1715[0...n]

Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.000 Factory setting 0.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the proportional gain of the current controller. This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.

p1717[0...n]

Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [ms] Factory setting 2.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the integral-action time of the current controller. Refer to: p1715

r1718

CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller). The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.

r1719

Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller).

r1723

CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller). The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-211

Parameters Parameter list

r1724

Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).

r1725

Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller.

p1726[0...n]

Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 75.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling This parameter is ineffective for sensorless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used. If p1726 is set to 0, then the quadrature de-coupling is de-activated. The integral component of the Isd current controller remains effective in the complete speed control range. For the closed-loop control of synchronous motors, this parameter is used to scale the current controller de-coupling.

p1727[0...n]

Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached.

r1728

De-coupling voltage, in-line axis / U_dir-axis_decoupl


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis.

1-212

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1729

De-coupling voltage, quadrature axis / U_quad_decoupl


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis.

p1730[0...n]

Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd_ctr I_compDeac


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 30 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150 [%] Factory setting 30 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold for deactivating the integral component of the Isd controller. The d current controller is only effective as P controller for speeds greater than the threshold value. Instead of the integral component, the quadrature arm decoupling is effective. For settings above 80%, the d current controller is active up to the field weakening limit. When operated at the voltage limit, this can result in an unstable behavior. In order to avoid this, the dynamic voltage reserve p1574 should be increased. The parameter value is referred to the synchronous rated motor speed.

Warning:

Note:

p1731[0...n]

Isd controller combination current time component / Isd ctrl iCombi T1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [ms] Factory setting 0.00 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the time constant to calculate the d current DC component difference (combination current) to add to the d current controller actual value. The additional input is de-activated with p1731 = 0.

r1732[0...1]

CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the direct-axis voltage setpoint Ud. [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045

r1733[0...1]

CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 5_1 Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the quadrature-axis component of voltage setpoint Uq. [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-213

Parameters Parameter list

p1740[0...n]

Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.025 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range that current is injected.

p1745[0...n]

Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [%] Factory setting 5.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled. If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then status signal r1408.12 is set to 1. If a stalled drive is detected (r1408.12 = 1), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178. Refer to: p2178 Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)).

r1746

Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Signal to initiate stall detection The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)).

p1749[0...n]

Motor model increase changeover speed encoderless operation / IncrChgov enc-less


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 99.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Depending on the machine data, the drive has calculated a minimum value of the operating frequency for rugged operation. If the minimum value is greater than the lower changeover limit parameterized with p1755 * (1 - 2 * p1756), then the difference is displayed using p1749 * p1755.

Dependency:

Refer to: p1755, p1756

p1750[0...n]
PM230

Motor model configuration / MotMod config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 1100 bin Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the configuration for the motor model. Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).

1-214

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM). Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM). Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM). Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM). Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model (open-loop/closed-loop controlled) for regenerative operation (ASM). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 06 07 Dependency: Caution: Signal name Controlled start Controlled through 0 Hz Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for passive loads Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Closed-loop control when motor is blocked Use rugged changeover limits 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP -

Refer to: p0500 Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to blocking (p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1). Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for encoderless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500. Re bit 2 = 1: The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed controlled mode. This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor. If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate. When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored. Re bit 2 = 0: Bit 3 is also automatically deactivated. Re bit 6 = 1: The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors: For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into open-loop controlled operation. Re bit 7 = 1: The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors: If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755. The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is given by Min(p1758, 0.5 * r0384). Activation can make sense for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies and therefore low speed gradients. It must be ensured that p1610, p1611 have been adequately parameterized.

Note:

p1750[0...n]
PM240 PM250, PM260

Motor model configuration / MotMod config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 0000 bin Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the configuration for the motor model. Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM). Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM). Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM). Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-215

Parameters Parameter list

Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM). Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model (open-loop/closed-loop controlled) for regenerative operation (ASM). Bit field: Bit 00 01 02 03 06 07 Dependency: Caution: Signal name Controlled start Controlled through 0 Hz Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for passive loads Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Closed-loop control when motor is blocked Use rugged changeover limits 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No FP -

Refer to: p0500 Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to blocking (p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1). Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for encoderless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500. Re bit 2 = 1: The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed controlled mode. This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor. If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate. When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored. Re bit 2 = 0: Bit 3 is also automatically deactivated. Re bit 6 = 1: The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors: For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into open-loop controlled operation. Re bit 7 = 1: The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors: If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755. The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is given by Min(p1758, 0.5 * r0384). Activation can make sense for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies and therefore low speed gradients. It must be ensured that p1610, p1611 have been adequately parameterized.

Note:

r1751

Motor model status / MotMod status


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Controlled operation Set ramp-function generator Stop RsLh adaptation Feedback Holding angle Acceleration criterion Set angular integrator PEM Stop Kt adaptation PEM 1 signal Active Active Yes Active Yes Active No No Factory setting 0 signal Inactive Inactive No Inactive No Inactive Yes Yes FP 6721 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status of the motor model. Bit 00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08

1-216

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Note:

PolID active PEM SLVC I injection PEM Speed controller output cannot be set to zero Rs adapt waits mot oper Stator frequency sign Torque sign Pulse injection active PEM Operation with rugged model feedback Operation of the current model with current feedback Current feedback in the current model Rugged increase of the changeover limits

No No Yes Yes Yes Positive Motor mode Yes Enabled Enabled Active Active

Yes Yes No No No Negative Regenerative mode No Inhibited Inhibited Inactive Inactive

Re bit 17: Displays the status when enabling the rugged model feedback (p1784) for operation with and without encoder. The feedback is used to increase the parameter ruggedness of the motor model and is effective in the operating range of the two-component closed loop current control. Re bit 18: Displays the status when enabling the differential current feedback in the current model for operation with encoder. The function is automatically enabled with p1784 > 0 or p1731 > 0. The feedback is used for a rugged change between the current model and complete machine model with active rugged model feedback and combination current. Re bit 19: Displays the currently active stator circuit feedback in current model operation. Re bit 20: Displays the currently effective increase of the changeover limits by the value p1749 * p1755.

p1755[0...n]

Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 210000.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation. Refer to: p1749, p1756 The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used in steady-state operation without encoder. If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make sense to increase the parameter value.

Note:

The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.

p1756

Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgov hys
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 95.0 [%] Factory setting 50.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation. Refer to: p1755 The parameter value refers to p1755.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-217

Parameters Parameter list

p1758[0...n]

Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 100 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 500 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled operation to open-loop controlled operation. Refer to: p1755, p1756

p1759[0...n]

Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the minimum time for exceeding the changeover speed when changing from open-loop controlled operation to closed-loop controlled operation. Refer to: p1755, p1756 When p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output frequency only.

r1762[0...1]

Motor model deviation component 1 / MotMod dev comp 1


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Induction motor (ASM): Displays the referred imaginary system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM): Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation. r1762.0: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF. r1762.1: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique.

Index:

[0] = Deviation Model1 [1] = Deviation Model2

r1763

Motor model deviation component 2 / MotMod dev comp 2


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Induction motor (ASM): Displays the referred real system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM): Not used.

1-218

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1764[0...n]

Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.000 Factory setting 1000.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.

r1765

Motor model, speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation.

p1767[0...n]

Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200 [ms] Factory setting 4 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder

r1768

Motor model, speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation.

r1770

CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.

r1771

CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-219

Parameters Parameter list

r1773[0...1]

Motor model slip speed / MotMod slip


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays estimated (speed) signals of the motor model. r1773[0]: Displays the estimated (mechanical) slip of the motor model. r1773[1]: Displays the estimated input speed of the motor model.

Index:

[0] = Slip speed estimated [1] = Speed estimated

p1774[0...n]

Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -5.000 [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit. The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.

p1775[0...n]

Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -5.000 [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5.000 [V] Factory setting 0.000 [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit. The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.

r1776[0...6]

Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the internal status signals of the motor model: Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models Index 1: Changeover ramp for model tracking (encoderless induction motors only) Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (encoderless induction motors only) Index 6: Transition ramp for EMF deviation at PLL input (encoderless PESM)

Index:

[0] = Changeover ramp motor model [1] = Changeover ramp model tracking [2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency encoderless ASM [3] = Reserved [4] = Reserved [5] = Reserved [6] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless PESM

1-220

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1778

Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang. diff.


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [] Calculated: Scaling: p2005 Unit selection: Max - [] Factory setting - [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle. A setting for smoothing the display can be made using p1754.

p1780[0...n]

Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0101 1100 bin Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model. Induction motor (ASM): Rs, Lh, and offset compensation. Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PEM): kT

Bit field:

Bit 01 02 03 04 06 07 10

Signal name Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Select motor model PEM kT adaptation Select motor model offset adaptation Select pole position identification PEM encoderless Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Filter time combination current like current ctrl integral time

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No No No No

FP -

Dependency: Note:

In U/f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 is relevant. For active motor model feedback (see p1784), the Lh adaptation is internally deactivated automatically. ASM: Induction motor PEM: Permanent magnet synchronous motor When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is deactivated and is instead taken into account in the motor model. In order that the correction values of the Rs, Lh and kT adaptation (selected using Bit 0 ... Bit 2) are correctly accepted when changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each different motor.

p1784[0...n]

Motor model feedback scaling / MotMod fdbk scal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [%] Factory setting 0.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Note:

Sets the scaling for model fault feedback. Feeding back the measured model fault to the model states increases the control stability and makes the motor model rugged against parameter errors. When feedback is selected (p1784 > 0), Lh adaptation is not effective.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-221

Parameters Parameter list

p1785[0...n]

Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10.000 Factory setting 0.100 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).

p1786[0...n]

Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).

r1787[0...n]

Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM). Refer to: p0826, p1780 The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This also happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826). The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.

r1791

Motor model Lh adaptation power-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the power-on stator frequency/ primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).

r1792

Motor model Lh adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).

1-222

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1795[0...n]

Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the integral time of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM).

r1797[0...n]

Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Nm/A] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Nm/A] Factory setting - [Nm/A] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the corrective value of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM). Refer to: p0826, p1780 The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.

p1800[0...n]

Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 2.000 [kHz] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 16.000 [kHz] Factory setting 4.000 [kHz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the pulse frequency for the converter. This parameter is pre-set to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned. Refer to: p0230 The maximum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used. When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be reduced (derating, refer to r0067). If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be set below the minimum value required for the filter. For operation with output reactors, the pulse frequency is limited to 4 kHz (see p0230). If p1800 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1800 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p1082).

r1801[0...1]

CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [kHz] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max - [kHz] Factory setting - [kHz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Display and connector output for the actual converter switching frequency. [0] = Actual [1] = Modulator minimum value The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-223

Parameters Parameter list

p1802[0...n]
PM230

Modulator mode / Modulator mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 19 Automatic changeover SVM/FLB Space vector modulation (SVM) SVM without overcontrol SVM/FLB without overcontrol SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction Optimized pulse pattern Factory setting 10 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the modulator mode. 0: 2: 3: 4: 10: 19:

Dependency:

If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This is not valid for the power units PM260. p1802 = 10 can only be set for the PM230 and PM240 power units. Refer to: p0230, p0500 When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth must be limited using p1803 (default, p1803 = 98%). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and torque ripple. With p1802 = 10, the modulation depth limit is automatically reduced to 100% in the critical output frequency range (over approx. 57 Hz). When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.

Note:

p1802[0...n]
PM240

Modulator mode / Modulator mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10 Automatic changeover SVM/FLB Space vector modulation (SVM) SVM without overcontrol SVM/FLB without overcontrol SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the modulator mode. 0: 2: 3: 4: 10:

Dependency:

If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This is not valid for the power units PM260. p1802 = 10 can only be set for the PM230 and PM240 power units. Refer to: p0230, p0500 When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2,10), the modulation depth must be limited using p1803 (default p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and torque ripple. When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.

Note:

p1802[0...n]
PM250 PM260

Modulator mode / Modulator mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 Automatic changeover SVM/FLB Space vector modulation (SVM) Factory setting 4 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the modulator mode. 0: 2:

1-224

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

3: 4: Dependency:

SVM without overcontrol SVM/FLB without overcontrol

If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This is not valid for the power units PM260. p1802 = 10 can only be set for the PM230 and PM240 power units. Refer to: p0230, p0500 When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2,10), the modulation depth must be limited using p1803 (default p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and torque ripple. When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.

Note:

p1803[0...n]
PM230

Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 20.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 120.0 [%] Factory setting 115.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Defines the maximum modulation depth. Refer to: p0500 p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching delay).

p1803[0...n]
PM240

Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 20.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150.0 [%] Factory setting 106.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Defines the maximum modulation depth. Refer to: p0500 p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching delay).

p1803[0...n]
PM250 PM260

Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 20.0 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 150.0 [%] Factory setting 106.0 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Defines the maximum modulation depth. Default setting PM260: 103 %. Refer to: p0500 p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching delay).

p1806[0...n]

Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the filter time constant of the DC link voltage used to calculate the modulation depth.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-225

Parameters Parameter list

r1808

DC link voltage actual value for U_max calculation / Vdc act val U_max
Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 5_2 Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage.

r1809

CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 9 Flat top modulation (FLB) Space vector modulation (SVM) Optimized pulse pattern Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Displays the effective modulator mode. 1: 2: 9:

p1810

Modulator configuration / Modulator config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Avg value filter for U_lim (only for Vdc_comp. in modulator) DC link voltage compensation in the current control 1 signal Yes Yes Factory setting 0000 bin 0 signal No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for the modulator. Bit 00 01

Notice: Note:

Bit 1 = 1 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1. Re bit 00 = 0: Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output voltage). Re bit 00 = 1: Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current). The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0). Re bit 01 = 0: DC link voltage compensation in the modulator. Re bit 01 = 1: DC link voltage compensation in the current control.

p1820[0...n]

Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev


Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(2), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor without setpoint change. If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this parameter. This means that the direction of the motor is reversed without the setpoint being changed.

1-226

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Value: Note:

0: 1:

OFF ON

This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited.

p1825

Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.0 [Vrms] Factory setting 0.6 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated. The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

p1828

Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3.99 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U. The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

p1829

Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3.99 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.

p1830

Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3.99 [s] Factory setting 0.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.

p1832

Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [Arms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [Arms] Factory setting 0.0 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the current level for the dead time compensation. Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previously calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced.

Dependency:

The factory setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-227

Parameters Parameter list

p1900

Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
Access level: 2 Can be changed: C(1), T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization. The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary (p1900 = 1, 2; also refer to p1910). Based on this, additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor rotating (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960). p1900 = 0: Function inhibited. p1900 = 1: Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300 When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution. With the following power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds. p1900 = 2: Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0 When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution. p1900 = 3: Sets p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300 This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill. When the drive enable signals are present, with the next power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor speeds.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3:

Inhibited Identify motor data at standstill and with motor rotating Identify motor data at standstill Identify motor data with motor rotating

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p1300, p1910, p1960 Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, F07988, F07990, A07991 p1900 = 3: This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill. If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971). For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set. The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the drive automatically resets it. The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced by the motor size and the mechanical conditions. p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.

1-228

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1901

Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 bin Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation. Bit 00: Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit once/always when the pulses are enabled. Bit 01: Check for ground fault once/always when the pulses are enabled. Bit 02: Activation of the tests selected using bit 00 and/or bit 01 each time the pulses are enabled

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02

Signal name Phase short-circuit test pulse active Ground fault detection test pulse active Test pulse at each pulse enable

1 signal Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No

FP -

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0287 Re bit 02=0: If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), it is not repeated. Re bit 02=1: The test is not only performed after POWER ON, but also each time the pulses are enabled. If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1. If a ground fault is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.2.

r1902

Test pulse evaluation status / Test puls ev stat


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the status of the test pulse evaluation. Short-circuit test: Bit 0: The short-circuit test was executed without any fault. Bit 1: A phase short circuit has been detected. Bit 2: A ground fault test was successfully performed. Bit 3: A ground fault was detected. Bit 4: A test pulse longer than one sampling time has occurred

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 04

Signal name Short-circuit test executed Phase short-circuit detected Ground fault test successfully performed Ground fault detected Identification pulse width greater than the minimum pulse width

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No No

FP -

Note:

If the ground fault test was selected, but not successfully performed, then sufficient current will not be able to be established during the test pulse.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-229

Parameters Parameter list

p1909[0...n]

Motor data identification control word / MotID STW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: MDS

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for the motor data identification. Bit 00 02 03 05 06 07 11 12 14 15 16 Signal name Stator inductance estimate no measurement Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Leakage inductance estimate no measurement Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Activate vibration damping De-activate vibration detection De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld De-activate rotor resistance Rr measurement De-activate valve interlocking time measurement Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead time Short motor identification (lower quality)

Note:

The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors: Without de-selection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature inductance Lq are measured at a low current. When de-selecting with bit 11 or in the U/f mode, the stator inductance is measured at half the rated motor current. If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be deselected.

p1910

Motor data identification selection / MotID selection


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 26 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the motor data identification routine. The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next power-on command. p1910 = 1: All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters: p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830 After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated. p1910 = 20: Only for internal SIEMENS use.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 20: 21: 22: 23:

Inhibited Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance Voltage vector input Voltage vector input without filter Rectangular voltage vector input without filter Triangular voltage vector input without filter

1-230

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

24: 25: 26: Dependency:

Rectangular voltage vector input with filter Triangular voltage vector input with filter Enter voltage vector with DTC correction

"Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1, p3900 > 0) before executing the motor data identification routine! When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Refer to: p1900

Caution:

After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data identification routine is carried out as follows at the next power-on command: - current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals. - during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution. - however, no torque torque is generated.

Notice: Note:

If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971). When setting p1910, the following should be observed: 1. "With acceptance" means: The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influence on the controller setting. 2. "Without acceptance" means: The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926 (service parameters). The controller settings remain unchanged.

p1911

Number of phases to be identified / Qty ph to ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 1 phase U 2 phases U, V 3 phases U, V, W Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the number of phases to be identified. 1: 2: 3:

Note:

When identifying with several phases, the accuracy increases and also the time it takes to make the measurement.

r1912[0...2]

Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the identified stator resistance. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1913[0...2]

Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the identified rotor time constant.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-231

Parameters Parameter list

Index:

[0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1914[0...2]

Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the identified total leakage inductance. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1915[0...2]

Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the nominal stator inductance identified. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1916[0...2]

Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1917[0...2]

Identified stator inductance 2 / L_stator 2 ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

1-232

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1918[0...2]

Identified stator inductance 3 / L_stator 3 ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1919[0...2]

Identified stator inductance 4 / L_stator 4 ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [mH] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [mH] Factory setting - [mH] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1925[0...2]

Identified threshold voltage / U_threshold ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Vrms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Vrms] Factory setting - [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1926[0...2]

Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the identified effective valve lockout time. [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

r1927[0...2]

Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ohm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ohm] Factory setting - [ohm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays identified rotor resistance (on separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-233

Parameters Parameter list

Index:

[0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W

p1959[0...n]

Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Saturation characteristic identification Moment of inertia identification Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Speed controller optimization (vibration test) 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0001 1110 bin 0 signal No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement. Bit 01 02 03 04

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: F07988 The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps: Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369 Bit 02: p0341, p0342 Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496 Bit 04: Dependent on p1960 p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496

p1960

Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the rotating measurement. The rotating measurement is carried out after the next power-on command. The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300). p1300 < 20 (U/f open-loop control): It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization. p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation): Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode.

Value:

0: 1: 3:

Inhibited Rotating measurement in encoderless operation Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation

Dependency:

Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should have already been done. When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed. Refer to: p1300, p1900, p1959

Danger:

For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached during the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out.

Notice: Note:

If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2). To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971). When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971). Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to the end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made. The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s.

1-234

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p1961

Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 26 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 75 [%] Factory setting 40 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic. The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency). Refer to: p0310, p1959 Refer to: F07983 The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.

p1965

Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 75 [%] Factory setting 40 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test. Induction motor: The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency). Synchronous motor: The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum speed).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0310, p1959 Refer to: F07984, F07985 In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the lower speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value. The q leakage inductance (refer to p1959 bit 5) is determined at zero speed and at 50% of p1965 - however, with a maximum output frequency of 15 Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed.

p1967

Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 400 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization. For power units with a reduced DC link capacitance (e.g., PM250), the dynamic response of the controller is set to 40%. Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985

Note:

For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller. p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum. p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-235

Parameters Parameter list

r1968

Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test Refer to: p1959, p1967 Refer to: F07985 This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.

r1969

Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 25_1 Min - [kgm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0100 Max - [kgm] Factory setting - [kgm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive. After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342. IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2 NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2 Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959 Refer to: F07984

r1970[0...1]

Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vibration


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Hz] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Hz] Factory setting - [Hz] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Dependency:

Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test. [0] = Frequency low [1] = Frequency high Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985

p1980[0...n]

PolID technique / PolID technique


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10 Voltage pulsing 1st harmonics Voltage pulsing 2-stage Voltage pulsing 2-stage inverse DC current injection Factory setting 4 Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS

Description: Value:

Sets the pole position identification technique. 1: 4: 6: 10:

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p1780 Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4) cannot be applied to operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230).

1-236

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r1984

PolID angular difference / PolID ang diff


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [] Factory setting - [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the pole position identification. Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1985, r1987 When the pole position identification routine is executed several times, the spread of the measured values can be determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less than 2 degrees electrical.

r1985

PolID saturation curve / PolID sat_char


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [Arms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [Arms] Factory setting - [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the saturation characteristic of the pole position identification routine (saturation technique). Displays the current characteristic of the pole position identification routine (elasticity technique). Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1987 PolID: Pole position identification Regarding the saturation technique: The values for the characteristic of the last saturation-based pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace).

r1987

PolID trigger characteristic / PolID trig_char


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the trigger characteristic of the pole position identification routine. The values for the characteristic of the last pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace). The values for trigger characteristic and saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a time perspective.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985 PolID: Pole position identification The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic. - the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement. - the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine.

p1999[0...n]

Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 10 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 5000 [%] Factory setting 100 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description: Dependency:

Sets the scaling for the runtime of the pole position identification technique in which the current is injected. Refer to: p0341, p0342

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-237

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

For p1999 > 100 % (setting large moments of inertia) the following applies: There is no locked rotor monitoring (F07970 fault value 2).

Note:

For high moments of inertia, it is practical to scale the runtime of the calibration higher.

p2000

Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 6.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency. All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in ((rpm) / 60) x pole pair number)

Dependency:

This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using p0573 = 1. Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004, r3996 When the reference speed / reference frequency is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. Example 1: The signal of an analog input (e.g. r0755[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percentage input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000). Example 2: The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is converted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).

Notice: Note:

p2001

Reference voltage / Reference voltage


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 10 [Vrms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000 [Vrms] Factory setting 1000 [Vrms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for voltages. All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage values (= rms value) like the DC-link voltage. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). Note: This reference quantity also applies to direct voltage values. It is not interpreted as rms value, but as DC voltage value.

Dependency:

p2001 is only updated during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning has been carried out first for drive data set zero and as a result overwriting of the parameter has not been blocked by setting p0573 = 1. Refer to: r3996 When the reference voltage is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.

Notice: Note:

1-238

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Example: The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the parameterized scaling.

p2002

Reference current / I_ref


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0.10 [Arms] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 100.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for currents. All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

Dependency:

This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using p0573 = 1. Refer to: r3996 If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor must be taken into account. Example: p2002 = 100 A Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 % p0305[0] = 100 A Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current p0305[1] = 50 A Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current When the reference current is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

Notice:

Note:

If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity. Example: The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the parameterized scaling.

p2003

Reference torque / M_ref


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: 7_2 Min 0.01 [Nm] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 1.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for torque. All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

Dependency:

This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using p0573 = 1. Refer to: r3996 When the reference torque is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

Notice:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-239

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. Example: The actual value of the total torque (r0079) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized scaling.

r2004

Reference power / P_ref


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 14_10 Min - [kW] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max - [kW] Factory setting - [kW] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the reference quantity for power. All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

Dependency:

This value is calculated as follows: Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current. Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed. Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003

Note:

If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. The reference power is calculated as follows: - 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor) - reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)

p2005

Reference angle / Reference angle


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 90.00 [] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 180.00 [] Factory setting 90.00 [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for angle. All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

Dependency:

This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor.

Note:

p2006

Reference temp / Ref temp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 50.00 [C] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 300.00 [C] Factory setting 100.00 [C] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for temperature. All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

1-240

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2007

Reference acceleration / a_ref


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0.01 [rev/s] Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 500000.00 [rev/s] Factory setting 0.01 [rev/s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference quantity for acceleration rates. All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).

Dependency:

This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. The reference acceleration is calculated as follows: p2007 = p2000 / 1 [s]

Note:

p2010

Comm interface baud rate / Comm baud


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 4 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 12 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 57600 baud 76800 baud 93750 baud 115200 baud Factory setting 12 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the baud rate for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232). 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12:

Note:

Commissioning interface The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2011

Comm int address / Comm add


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 31 Factory setting 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the address for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232). The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2016[0...3]

CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word / Comm USS send word
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: 4000H Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via the commissioning interface USS.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-241

Parameters Parameter list

The actual values are displayed on an intelligent operator panel (IOP). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4

r2019[0...7]

Comm int error statistics / Comm err


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (USS, RS232). [0] = Number of error-free telegrams [1] = Number of rejected telegrams [2] = Number of framing errors [3] = Number of overrun errors [4] = Number of parity errors [5] = Number of starting character errors [6] = Number of checksum errors [7] = Number of length errors

p2020
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 4 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 13 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 57600 baud 76800 baud 93750 baud 115200 baud 187500 baud Factory setting 8 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the baud rate for the field bus interface (RS485). 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13:

Notice:

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. For p0014 = 0, the following applies: Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.

Note:

Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected. When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies: Min./max./factory setting: 4/13/8 When p2030 = 2 (MODBUS), the following applies: Min./max./factory setting: 5/13/7

1-242

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2021
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Field bus interface address / Field bus address


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 247 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface (RS485). The address can be set as follows: 1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit. --> p2021 displays the address setting. --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. 2) Using p2021 --> Only if an address of 0 or an address which is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the address switch. --> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM". --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: p2030 For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. For p0014 = 0, the following applies: Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.

Note:

Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected. When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies: Min./max./factory setting: 0/30/0 When p2030 = 2 (MODBUS), the following applies: Min./max./factory setting: 1/247/1

p2022
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD
Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 8 Factory setting 2 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface. Refer to: p2030 The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2023
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Field bus int USS PKW no. / Field bus USS PKW
Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 127 PKW 0 words PKW 3 words PKW 4 words PKW variable Factory setting 127 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface. 0: 3: 4: 127:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-243

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p2030 The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2024[0...2]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Fieldbus interface times / Fieldbus times


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting [0] 1000 [ms] [1] 0 [ms] [2] 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the time values for the fieldbus interface. The following applies for MODBUS: p2024[0]: Maximum permissible telegram processing time of the MODBUS slave in which a reply is sent back to the MODBUS master. p2024[1]: Character delay time (time between individual characters in the telegram). p2024[2]: Telegram pause time (pause time between two telegrams).

Index:

[0] = Max. processing time [1] = Character delay time [2] = Telegram pause time Refer to: p2020, p2030 Re p2024[1,2] (MODBUS): If the field bus baud rate is changed (p2020), the default time settings are restored. The default setting is the time required for 1.5 characters (p2024[1]) or 3.5 characters (p2024[2]) (depending on the set baud rate).

Dependency: Note:

r2029[0...7]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Field bus int error statistics / Field bus error


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (RS485). [0] = Number of error-free telegrams [1] = Number of rejected telegrams [2] = Number of framing errors [3] = Number of overrun errors [4] = Number of parity errors [5] = Number of starting character errors [6] = Number of checksum errors [7] = Number of length errors

p2030
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 No protocol PROFIBUS Factory setting 3 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Notice:

Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface. 0: 3:

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

1-244

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2030
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 No protocol USS MODBUS Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface. 0: 1: 2:

Notice:

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p2030
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol


Access level: 1 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 7 No protocol PROFINET Factory setting 7 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Notice:

Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface. 0: 7:

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

r2032

Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name ON/OFF1 OC / OFF2 OC / OFF3 Operation enable Ramp-function generator enable Start ramp-function generator Speed setpoint enable Acknowledge fault Jog bit 0 Jog bit 1 Master ctrl by PLC 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No FP 3030 3030 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-245

Parameters Parameter list

Notice: Note:

The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device. OC: Operating condition

p2037
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / PD STW1.10=0


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description:

Max 2

Factory setting 0

Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC". Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.

Value:

0: 1: 2:

Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life Do not freeze setpoints

Note:

If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then p2037 should be set to 2.

p2038
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description:

Max 2

Factory setting 0

Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words. When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits in the control and status words.

Value: Dependency: Notice: Note:

0: 2:

SINAMICS VIK-NAMUR

Refer to: p0922, p2079 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. - For p0922 (p2079) = 1, 350 ... 999, p2038 is automatically set to 0. - For p0922 (p2079) = 20, p2038 is automatically set to 2. It is not then possible to change p2038.

p2039

Select debug monitor interface / Debug monit select


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (commissioning interface, RS232) or COM2 (fieldbus interface, RS485). Value = 0: De-activated Value = 1: COM1, commissioning protocol is de-activated Value = 2: COM2, field bus is de-activated Value = 3: Reserved

Note:

Value = 2 is only possible for Control Units with RS485 as a field bus interface.

1-246

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2040
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1999999 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface. If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output. Refer to: F01910 0: The monitoring is de-activated.

p2042
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB Ident No.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the PROFIBUS Ident Number (PNO-ID). SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex).

Value: Notice:

0: 1:

SINAMICS VIK-NAMUR

For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

r2043.0...2
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state. Bit 00 02 Signal name Setpoint failure Fieldbus oper

Max 1 signal Yes Yes

Factory setting 0 signal No No FP -

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p2044 When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered when the setpoint fails.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-247

Parameters Parameter list

p2044
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIdrive fault delay / PD fault delay


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Min 0 [s] Description:

Max 100 [s]

Factory setting 0 [s]

Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure. The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction).

Dependency:

Refer to: r2043 Refer to: F01910

p2047
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 20000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS. The additional monitoring time enables short bus faults to be compensated. If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: F01910 For controller STOP, the additional monitoring time is not effective.

r2050[0...11]

CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PZD recv word


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: 4000H Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the fieldbus controller. [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12

1-248

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2051[0...11]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: 4000H Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Integer16 Data set: -

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2089[0] [1] 63[0] [2...11] 0

Description: Index:

Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller. [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Notice:

p2051[0...11]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: 4000H Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller. [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Notice:

r2053[0...11]

PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word / Diag send word


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the fieldbus controller.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-249

Parameters Parameter list

Index:

[0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

Bit field:

r2054
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS status / PB status


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 OFF No connection (search for baud rate) Connection OK (baud rate found) Cyclic connection with master (data exchange) Cyclic data OK Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Status display for the PROFIBUS interface. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:

r2055[0...2]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface. [0] = Master bus address [1] = Master input total length bytes [2] = Master output total length bytes

1-250

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r2057
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIBUS address switch diagnostics / PB addr_sw diag


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the setting of the PROFIBUS address switch "DP ADDRESS" on the Control Unit. Refer to: p0918

r2060[0...10]

CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / PZD recv DW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: 4000H Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Integer32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the fieldbus controller. [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Refer to: r2050 Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types. A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060.

Dependency: Notice:

p2061[0...10]

CI: PROFIBUS PZD send double word / PZD send DW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: 4000H Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Integer32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller. [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Refer to: p2051 A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2051 or r2061. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Dependency: Notice:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-251

Parameters Parameter list

r2063[0...10]

PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / Diag send DW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the fieldbus controller. [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

Bit field:

Notice:

A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.

1-252

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r2067[0...1]

PZD maximum interconnected / PZDmaxIntercon


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Display for the maximum interconnected PZD in the receive/send direction Index 0: receive (r2050, r2060) Index 1: send (p2051, p2061)

r2074[0...11]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / Diag addr recv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Value range: 0 - 125: Bus address of the sender 65535: not assigned

Note:

r2075[0...11]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / Diag offs recv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-253

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned

r2076[0...11]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F

PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / Diag offs send


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: not assigned

Note:

r2077[0...15]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Min Description:

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS.

p2079
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD tel ext


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 1 Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.

Max 999

Factory setting 1

Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. For p0922 < 999 the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are inhibited. For p0922 = 999 the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set. For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies: The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.

1-254

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Value:

1: 20: 350: 352: 353: 354: 999:

Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6 SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4 SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4 Free telegram configuration with BICO

Dependency:

Refer to: p0922

p2080[0...15]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 899.0 [1] 899.1 [2] 899.2 [3] 2139.3 [4] 899.4 [5] 899.5 [6] 899.6 [7] 2139.7 [8] 2197.7 [9] 899.9 [10] 2199.1 [11] 1407.7 [12] 899.12 [13] 2135.14 [14] 2197.3 [15] 2135.15

Description: Index:

Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form status word 1. [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Refer to: p2088, r2089 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Dependency: Notice:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-255

Parameters Parameter list

p2080[0...15]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form status word 1. [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Refer to: p2088, r2089 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Dependency: Notice:

p2081[0...15]

BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form status word 2. [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Refer to: p2088, r2089 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Dependency: Notice:

1-256

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2082[0...15]

BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3. [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Refer to: p2088, r2089 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.

Dependency: Notice:

p2083[0...15]

BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4. [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Refer to: p2088, r2089

Dependency:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-257

Parameters Parameter list

p2084[0...15]

BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Index:

Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5. [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 Refer to: p2088, r2089

Dependency:

p2088[0...4]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Min Description: Index:

Max -

Factory setting [0] 1010 1000 0000 0000 bin [1...4] 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin

Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter. [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP -

Bit field:

1-258

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

14 15 Dependency:

Bit 14 Bit 15

Inverted Inverted

Not inverted Not inverted

Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089

p2088[0...4]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter. [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted 0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted FP -

Bit field:

Dependency:

Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089

r2089[0...4]

CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word. [0] = Status word 1 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

Bit field:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-259

Parameters Parameter list

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dependency: Note:

Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Refer to: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083 r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters.

r2090.0...15

BO: PROFIdrive PZD1 receive bit-serial / PZD1 recv bitw


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

r2091.0...15

BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / PZD2 recv bitw


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13

1-260

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

14 15

Bit 14 Bit 15

ON ON

OFF OFF

r2092.0...15

BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial / PZD3 recv bitw


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

r2093.0...15

BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial / PZD4 recv bitw


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-261

Parameters Parameter list

r2094.0...15

BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller. The PZD is selected via p2099[0]. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

Dependency:

Refer to: p2099

r2095.0...15

BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller. The PZD is selected via p2099[1]. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP -

Dependency:

Refer to: p2099

1-262

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2098[0...1]

Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter. Using p2098[0], the signals of CI: p2099[0] are influenced. Using p2098[1], the signals of CI: p2099[1] are influenced.

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Signal name Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15

1 signal Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted Inverted

0 signal Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted Not inverted

FP -

Dependency:

Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099

p2099[0...1]

CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter. A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (interconnection).

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r2094, r2095 From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted. p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters: Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15 Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15

p2100[0...19]

Setting the fault number for fault response / F_no F response


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index. Refer to: p2101

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-263

Parameters Parameter list

Notice:

For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault: - if there is no existing fault number. - the message type is not "fault" (F).

Note:

Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved.

p2101[0...19]

Setting the fault response / Fault response


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 6 NONE OFF1 OFF2 OFF3 STOP2 Internal armature short-circuit / DC braking Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the fault response for the selected fault. 0: 1: 2: 3: 5: 6:

Dependency: Note:

The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index. Refer to: p2100 Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification. Example: F12345 and fault response = NONE (OFF1, OFF2) --> The fault response NONE can be changed to OFF1 or OFF2. Re value = 1 (OFF1): Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit. Re value = 2 (OFF2): Internal/external pulse inhibit. Re value = 3 (OFF3): Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit. Re value = 5 (STOP2): n_set = 0 Re value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC braking): This value can only be set for all drive data sets when p1231 = 4. a) DC braking is not possible for synchronous motors. b) DC braking is possible for induction motors.

p2103[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 2090.7 [1] 722.2 [2] 2090.7 [3] 2090.7

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

1-264

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2103[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting [0] 722.2 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults. The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2104[0...n]
CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Min -

Max -

Factory setting [0] 722.2 [1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0

Description: Note:

Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults. A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2104[0...n]
CU240B-2 CU240E-2 CU240E-2_F

BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Note:

Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults. A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2105[0...n]

BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Note:

Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults. A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-265

Parameters Parameter list

p2106[0...n]

BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for external fault 1. Refer to: F07860 An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2107[0...n]

BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for external fault 2. Refer to: F07861 An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2108[0...n]

BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112 Refer to: F07862 An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

r2109[0...63]

Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2130, r2133, r2136 The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds). The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.

1-266

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r2110[0...63]

Alarm number / Alarm number


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

This parameter is identical to r2122.

p2111

Alarm counter / Alarm counter


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset. When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated: - all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63]. - the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125

Note:

The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

p2112[0...n]

BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for external alarm 1. Refer to: A07850 An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

r2114[0...1]

System runtime total / Sys runtime tot


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit. The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days). After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.

Index: Dependency: Note:

[0] = Milliseconds [1] = Days Refer to: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146 When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter values are saved. After the drive unit is powered up, the counter continues to run with the last value that was saved.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-267

Parameters Parameter list

p2116[0...n]

BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for external alarm 2. Refer to: A07851 An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2117[0...n]

BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for external alarm 3. Refer to: A07852 An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2118[0...19]

Sets the message number for message type. / Msg_no Msg_type


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed. Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index. Refer to: p2119 It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type in the following cases: - if there is no existing message number. Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message has gone.

p2119[0...19]

Setting the message type / Message type


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Fault (F) Alarm (A) No message (N) Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm. 1: 2: 3:

Dependency: Note:

Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index. Refer to: p2118 Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message has gone. The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification.

1-268

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Example: F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345. In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically removed.

r2120

CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit. Refer to: r0944, r2121

r2121

CO: Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125

r2122[0...63]

Alarm code / Alarm code


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the number of alarms that have occurred. Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146 The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Alarm buffer structure (general principle): r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest) ... r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest) When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history: r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest) ... r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)

r2123[0...63]

Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146 The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-269

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

r2124[0...63]

Alarm value / Alarm value


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Integer32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number). Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146 The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

r2125[0...63]

Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [ms] Factory setting - [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2134, r2145, r2146 The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds). The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

p2126[0...19]

Setting fault number for acknowledge mode / Fault_no ackn_mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index Refer to: p2127 It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases: - Fault number does not exist. - Message type is not "fault" (F).

Note:

Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved.

p2127[0...19]

Sets acknowledgement mode / Acknowledge mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Acknowledgment only using POWER ON Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency:

Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault. 1: 2:

Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index Refer to: p2126

1-270

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Notice:

It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases: - if there is no existing fault number. - the message type is not "fault" (F).

Note:

Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved. The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification. Example: F12345 and acknowledge mode = IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON) --> The acknowledge mode can be changed from IMMEDIATELY to POWER ON.

p2128[0...15]

Selecting fault/alarm code for trigger / Message trigger


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Selects faults or alarms which can be used as trigger. Refer to: r2129

r2129.0...15

CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Trigger signal p2128[0] Trigger signal p2128[1] Trigger signal p2128[2] Trigger signal p2128[3] Trigger signal p2128[4] Trigger signal p2128[5] Trigger signal p2128[6] Trigger signal p2128[7] Trigger signal p2128[8] Trigger signal p2128[9] Trigger signal p2128[10] Trigger signal p2128[11] Trigger signal p2128[12] Trigger signal p2128[13] Trigger signal p2128[14] Trigger signal p2128[15] 1 signal ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Factory setting 0 signal OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Trigger signal for the selected faults and alarms Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Dependency: Note:

If one of the faults or alarms selected in p2128[n] occurs, then the particular bit of this binector output is set. Refer to: p2128 CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred. CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-271

Parameters Parameter list

r2130[0...63]

Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2133, r2136 The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds). The value displayed in p2130 refers to 01.01.1970. The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2131

CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the code of the oldest active fault. Refer to: r3131, r3132 0: No fault present.

r2132

CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred. 0: No alarm present.

r2133[0...63]

Fault value for float values / Fault val float


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2136 The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2134[0...63]

Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2145, r2146 The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

1-272

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r2135.12...15

CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Fault motor overtemperature Fault power unit thermal overload Alarm motor overtemperature Alarm power unit thermal overload 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the second status word of faults and alarms. Bit 12 13 14 15

r2136[0...63]

Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv. days


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed. Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133 The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds). The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2138.7...15

CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Acknowledge fault External alarm 1 (A07850) effective External alarm 2 (A07851) effective External alarm 3 (A07852) effective External fault 1 (F07860) effective External fault 2 (F07861) effective External fault 3 (F07862) effective 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the control word of the faults and alarms. Bit 07 10 11 12 13 14 15

Dependency:

Refer to: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112

r2139.0...12

CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Being acknowledged Acknowledgment required Fault present 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the first status word of faults and alarms. Bit 00 01 03

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-273

Parameters Parameter list

06 07 08 11 12 Note:

Internal message 1 present Alarm present Internal message 2 present Alarm class bit 0 Alarm class bit 1

Yes Yes Yes High High

No No No Low Low

Re bit 03, 07: These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present"/"alarm present" has occurred, a change in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121). Re bit 06, 08: These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only. Re bit 11, 12: These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes only on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.

p2140[0...n]

Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 300.00 [rpm] Factory setting 90.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2155, r2197

p2141[0...n]

Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 5.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1). Refer to: p2142, r2199

p2142[0...n]

Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 300.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1). Refer to: p2141, r2199

p2144[0...n]

BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring.

1-274

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198 Refer to: F07900 When interconnecting the enable signal with r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint - actual value deviation.

r2145[0...63]

Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2146 The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds). The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

r2146[0...63]

Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145 The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds). The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).

p2148[0...n]

BI: RFG active / RFG active


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages: "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4) "Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)

Notice: Note:

The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. The binector input is automatically interconnected to r1199.2 as a default setting.

p2149[0...n]

Monitoring configuration / Monit config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Enable alarm A07903 Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant n_act > p2155 own hysteresis 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 1001 bin 0 signal No No No FP 8010 8013 8010 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for messages and monitoring functions. Bit 00 01 03

Dependency:

Refer to: r2197 Refer to: A07903

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-275

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

Re bit 00: Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act). Re bit 01: When the bit is set, load monitoring is only carried out in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic parameters (p2182 ... p2190). Re bit 03: When the bit is set, r2197 bit 1 and bit 2 are determined via separate hystereses.

p2150[0...n]

Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 300.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals: "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0) "n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5) "n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199

p2151[0...n]

CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1170[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages: "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7) "Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5) "|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4) "n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)

Dependency:

Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199

p2152[0...n]

Delay for comparison n > n_max / Del n > n_max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 200 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Delay time for the comparison of the speed with the maximum speed. Refer to: p1082, r1084, r1087, p2162

p2153[0...n]

Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value. The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.

Dependency:

Refer to: r2169

1-276

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2155[0...n]

Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 900.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2140, r2197

p2156[0...n]

On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 0.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1). Refer to: p2141, p2142, r2199

p2157[0...n]

Speed threshold 5 / n_thresh val 5


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 900.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 5" (BO: r2198.0) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 5" (BO: r2198.1)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2150, p2158

p2158[0...n]

Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 5 / Del compar n_5
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 10 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Delay time for the comparison of the speed with the speed threshold value 5 (P2157). Refer to: p2150, p2157

p2159[0...n]

Speed threshold 6 / n_thresh val 6


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 900.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 6" (BO: r2198.2) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 6" (BO: r2198.3)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2150, p2160

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-277

Parameters Parameter list

p2160[0...n]

Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 6 / Del compar n_6
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 10 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time for the comparison of the speed with the speed threshold value 6 (p2159). Refer to: p2150, p2159

p2161[0...n]

Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 5.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0). Refer to: p2150, r2199

p2162[0...n]

Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 60000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6). Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197 For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311 For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082 If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commissioning mode.

Note:

For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit (r1084) above the limit value. If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to increase the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can only be increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is sufficiently greater than the speed limit p1082.

p2163[0...n]

Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 90.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7). Refer to: p2164, p2166, r2197

1-278

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2164[0...n]

Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 200.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7). Refer to: p2163, p2166, r2197

p2166[0...n]

Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 200.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7). Refer to: p2163, p2164, r2197

p2167[0...n]

Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.0 [ms] Factory setting 200.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO: r2199.4).

r2169

CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 3_1 Min - [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: p0505 Max - [rpm] Factory setting - [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the smoothed actual speed for messages/signals. Refer to: p2153

p2170[0...n]

Current threshold value / I_thres


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 6_2 Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max 10000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the absolute current threshold for the messages. "I_act >= I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2197.8) "I_act < I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2198.8)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2171

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-279

Parameters Parameter list

p2171[0...n]

Current threshold value reached delay time / t_del I_thresh rch


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 10 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time for the comparison of the current actual value (r0068) with the current threshold value (p2170). Refer to: p2170

p2172[0...n]

DC link voltage, threshold value / Vdc thresh val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 5_2 Min 0 [V] Calculated: Scaling: p2001 Unit selection: p0505 Max 2000 [V] Factory setting 800 [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the DC link voltage threshold value for the following messages: "Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.9) "Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.10)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2173

p2173[0...n]

DC link voltage comparison delay time / t_del Vdc


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 10 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time for the comparison of the DC link voltage r0070 with the threshold value p2172. Refer to: p2172

p2174[0...n]

Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 5.13 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the torque threshold value for the messages: "Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached" (BO: r2198.9) "Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10) "Torque setpoint > torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.13)

Dependency:

Refer to: p2195, r2198

p2175[0...n]

Motor blocked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 120.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6). Refer to: p0500, p2177, r2198

1-280

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The following applies for sensorless vector control: At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a blocked motor cannot be detected.

p2176[0...n]

Torque threshold value comparison delay time / M_thrsh comp T_del


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 200 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time for the comparison of the torque actual value (r0080) with torque threshold value 1 (p2174). Refer to: p2174

p2177[0...n]

Motor blocked delay time / Mot lock t_del


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65.000 [s] Factory setting 3.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the delay time for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6). Refer to: p0500, p2175, r2198 The following applies for sensorless vector control: At low speeds a locked motor can only be detected if no change is made to open-loop speed controlled operation. If this is the case, the value in p2177 must be reduced accordingly (p2177 < p1758) before time p2177 has elapsed in order to detect the locked state reliably. As countermeasure, it is generally also possible to set p1750.6. This is only not permitted if the drive is slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit (speed below p1755 for longer than p1758).

p2178[0...n]

Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10.000 [s] Factory setting 0.010 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7). Refer to: r2198 In the open-loop speed controlled operating range (see p1755, p1756), vector control stall monitoring depends on threshold p1745. At higher speeds, the difference between flux setpoint r0083 and flux actual value r0084 is monitored.

p2179[0...n]

Output load identification current limit / Outp_ld iden I_lim


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 6_2 Min 0.00 [Arms] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: p2002 Unit selection: p0505 Max 1000.00 [Arms] Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the current limit for output load identification. Refer to: p2180 For synchronous motors the output current can be almost zero under no load conditions. A missing output load condition exists if the motor is either not connected or a phase has failed.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-281

Parameters Parameter list

p2180[0...n]

Missing output load delay time / No load t_delay


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000 [ms] Factory setting 2000 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time to detect a missing output load. Refer to: p2179

p2181[0...n]

Load monitoring response / Load monit resp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 6 Load monitoring disabled A07920 for torque/speed too low A07921 for torque/speed too high A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance F07923 for torque/speed too low F07924 for torque/speed too high F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6:

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, p2193, r2198, p3230, p3231 Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925 The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set. F07926 is evaluated only if p2181 is not zero. This parameter setting has no effect on the production of fault F07936.

p2182[0...n]

Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 150.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds: p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower) p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower) p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)

Dependency:

The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184 Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186

p2183[0...n]

Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 900.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.

1-282

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds: p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower) p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower) p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower) Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184 Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188

p2184[0...n]

Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds: p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower) p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower) p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)

Dependency:

The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184 Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190

p2185[0...n]

Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 10000000.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The following applies: p2185 > p2186 Refer to: p2182, p2186 The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.

p2186[0...n]

Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The following applies: p2186 < p2185 Refer to: p2182, p2185 The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.

p2187[0...n]

Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 10000000.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-283

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

The following applies: p2187 > p2188 Refer to: p2183, p2188 The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.

p2188[0...n]

Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The following applies: p2188 < p2187 Refer to: p2183, p2187 The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.

p2189[0...n]

Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 10000000.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The following applies: p2189 > p2190 Refer to: p2184, p2190 The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.

p2190[0...n]

Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 7_1 Min 0.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 20000000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring. The following applies: p2190 < p2189 Refer to: p2184, p2189 The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.

p2192[0...n]

Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65.00 [s] Factory setting 10.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.

1-284

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2193[0...n]

Load monitoring configuration / Load monit config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Monitoring switched out Monitoring torque and load drop Monitoring speed and load drop Monitoring load drop Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the load monitoring configuration. 0: 1: 2: 3:

Dependency:

Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198, p3230, p3231, p3232 Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925, F07936

p2194[0...n]

Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 90.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the torque threshold value for the message "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11). The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.

Dependency:

Refer to: r0033, p2195, r2199

p2195[0...n]

Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [ms] Factory setting 800.0 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed". The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.

Dependency:

Refer to: p2174, p2194

p2196[0...n]

Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the scaling factor for torque utilization (r0033).

r2197.0...13

CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the first status word for monitoring functions.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-285

Parameters Parameter list

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13

Signal name |n_act| <= n_min p1080 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 p2155 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 p2155 n_act >= 0 |n_act| >= n_set |n_act| <= n_standstill p1226 |n_act| > n_max Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance t_off I_act >= I_threshold value p2170 Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold value p2172 Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold value p2172 Output load is not present |n_act| > n_max (delayed) |n_act| > n_max (F07901)

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

FP 8020 8010 8010 8011 8020 8020 8010 8011 8020 8020 8020 8020 8021 -

Notice:

Re bit 06: When the overspeed is reached, this bit is set and F07901 output immediately following this. The bit is canceled again as soon as the next pulse inhibit is present.

Note:

Re bit 00: The threshold value is set in p1080 and the hysteresis in p2150. Re bit 01, 02: The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140. Re bit 03: 1 signal direction of rotation positive. 0 signal: direction of rotation negative. The hysteresis is set in p2150. Re bit 04: The threshold value is set in r1119 and the hysteresis in p2150. Re bit 05: The threshold value is set in p1266 and the delay time in p1228. Re bit 06: The hysteresis is set in p2162. Re bit 07: The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164. Re bit 08: The threshold value is set in p2170 and the delay time in p2171. Re bit 09, 10: The threshold value is set in p2172 and the delay time in p2173. Re bit 11: The threshold value is set in p2179 and the delay time in p2180. Re bit 12: The threshold value is set in p2182, the hysteresis in p2162, and the delay time (for canceling the signal) in p2152. Re bit 13: Only for internal Siemens use.

r2198.0...13

CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the second status word for monitoring functions.

1-286

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13

Signal name |n_act| <= speed threshold value 5 |n_act| > speed threshold value 5 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 6 |n_act| > speed threshold value 6 |n_set| < p2161 n_set > 0 Motor blocked Motor stalled |I_act| < I_threshold value p2170 |M_act| > torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached |M_set| < torque threshold value 1 Load monitoring signals an alarm Load monitoring signals a fault condition |M_act| > torque threshold value 1

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

FP 8021 8021 8021 8021 8011 8011 8012 8012 8020 8021 8012 8013 8013 8021

Note:

Re bit 10: The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174. Re bit 12: This bit is reset after the fault cause disappears, even if the fault itself is still present.

r2199.0...11

CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 f or n comparison value reached or exceeded Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance t_on Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No FP 8010 8010 8011 8011 8012 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the third status word for monitoring functions. Bit 00 01 04 05 11

Note:

Re bit 00: The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161. Re bit 01: The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit is not reset. Re bit 11: The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194.

p2200[0...n]

BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller. The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-287

Parameters Parameter list

p2201[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 10.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2202[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 20.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 2 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2203[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 30.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 3 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2204[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 40.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2205[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 50.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

1-288

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2206[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 60.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 6 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2207[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 70.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 7 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2208[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 80.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2209[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 90.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2210[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 10 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-289

Parameters Parameter list

p2211[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 110.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 11 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2212[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 120.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2213[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 130.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2214[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 140.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 14 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

p2215[0...n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 150.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the value for fixed value 15 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.

1-290

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2216[0...n]

Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel


Access level: 2 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Direct selection Binary selection Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Value:

Sets the method to select the fixed setpoints. 1: 2:

p2220[0...n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Refer to: p2221, p2222, p2223

p2221[0...n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2222, p2223

p2222[0...n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2223

p2223[0...n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller. Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-291

Parameters Parameter list

r2224

CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the selected and effective fixed value of the technology controller. Refer to: r2229

r2225.0

CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Technology controller fixed value selected 1 signal Yes Factory setting 0 signal No FP 7950, 7951 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word for the fixed value selection of the technology controller. Bit 00

r2229

Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller. Refer to: r2224

p2230[0...n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Data save active Initial rounding-off active Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 = 1 Ramp-function generator always active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0000 0100 bin 0 signal No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Bit 00 02 03 04

Dependency: Notice:

Refer to: r2231, p2240 For p0014 = 1, the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.

Note:

Re bit 00: 0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240. 1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.

1-292

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Re bit 02: 0: Without initial rounding-off 1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237). It is calculated as follows: r = 0.0001 x max(p2237, |p2238| ) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2] The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238 [%] / p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time. Re bit 03: 0: Non-volatile data save de-activated. 1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1). Re bit 04: When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250.

r2231

Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory / Tec_ctrl mop mem


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON. Refer to: p2230

p2235[0...n]

BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-up time (p2247) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p2235).

Dependency:

Refer to: p2236

p2236[0...n]

BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to continually reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-down time (p2248) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p2236).

Dependency:

Refer to: p2235

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-293

Parameters Parameter list

p2237[0...n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Refer to: p2238

p2238[0...n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting -100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Refer to: p2237

p2240[0...n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON. Refer to: p2230

r2245

CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG / Tec_ctr mop befRFG
Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology controller. Refer to: r2250

p2247[0...n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 10.0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Refer to: p2248 The time is referred to 100 %. When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.

1-294

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2248[0...n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.0 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.0 [s] Factory setting 10.0 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Refer to: p2247 The time is referred to 100 %. When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.

r2250

CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG / Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. Refer to: r2245

p2251

Technology controller mode / Tec_ctrl mode


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Technology controller as main speed setpoint Technology controller as supplementary speed setpoint Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency:

Sets the mode for using the technology controller output. 0: 1:

p2251 = 0, 1 is only effective if the enable signal of the technology controller is interconnected (p2200 > 0).

p2253[0...n]

CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2254, p2255

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-295

Parameters Parameter list

p2254[0...n]

CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency:

Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2253, p2256

p2255

Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2253

p2256

Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller. Refer to: p2254

p2257

Technology controller, ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 650.00 [s] Factory setting 1.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller. Refer to: p2258 The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.

p2258

Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 650.00 [s] Factory setting 1.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller. Refer to: p2257 The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.

1-296

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r2260

CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set aftRFG
Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.

p2261

Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

r2262

CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

p2263

Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 D component in the actual value signal D component in the fault signal Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the technology controller type. 0: 1:

p2264[0...n]

CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.

p2265

Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-297

Parameters Parameter list

r2266

CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller

p2267

Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller. Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271 Refer to: F07426 If the actual value exceeds this upper limit, this results in fault F07426.

p2268

Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 9_1 Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting -100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller. Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271 Refer to: F07426 If the actual value falls below this lower limit, this results in fault F07426.

p2269

Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 500.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller. Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2271 For 100%, the actual value is not changed.

p2270

Technology controller actual value function / Tec_ctr ActVal fct


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 No function Root function (root from x) Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Setting to use an arithmetic function for the actual value signal of the technology controller. 0: 1:

1-298

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

2: 3: Dependency:

Square function (x * x) Cube function (x * x * x)

Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271

p2271

Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Caution:

Setting to invert the actual value signal of the technology controller. The inversion depends on the sensor type for the actual value signal. 0: 1: No inversion Inversion actual value signal

If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can become unstable and can oscillate!

Note:

The correct setting can be determined as follows: - inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0). - increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal of the technology controller. --> If the actual value increases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 0 (no inversion). --> If the actual value decreases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 1 (the actual value signal is inverted).

r2272

CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller. Refer to: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271

r2273

CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctrl error


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: 9_1 Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: p0595 Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the error (system deviation) between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller. Refer to: p2263

p2274

Technology controller differentiation, time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 60.000 [s] Factory setting 0.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller. p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-299

Parameters Parameter list

p2280

Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.000 Factory setting 1.000 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller. p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.

p2285

Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.000 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 10000.000 [s] Factory setting 30.000 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Notice:

Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller. The following applies for p2251 = 0: If the output of the technology controller lies within the range of a suppression (skip) bandwidth (p1091 ... p1094, p1101) or below the minimum speed (p1080), the integral component of the controller is held so that the controller temporarily works as a P controller. This is necessary in order to prevent the controller from behaving in an unstable manner, as the ramp-function generator switches to the parameterized up and down ramps (p1120, p1121) at the same time in order to avoid setpoint steps. This state can be exited or avoided by changing the controller setpoint or by using the start speed (= minimum speed).

Note:

When the controller output reaches the limit, the I component of the controller is held. p2285 = 0: The integral time is disabled and the I component of the controller is reset.

p2286[0...n]

BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 56.13 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller.

p2289[0...n]

CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller.

p2291

CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_lim


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller. Refer to: p2292

1-300

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Caution:

The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).

p2292

CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -200.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller. Refer to: p2291 The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).

p2293

Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr ramp up/dn


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 [s] Factory setting 1.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller. Refer to: p2291, p2292 The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292).

r2294

CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig


Access level: 2 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the output signal of the technology controller. Refer to: p2295

p2295

CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -100.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 100.00 [%] Factory setting 100.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.

p2296[0...n]

CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 2295[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-301

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency:

Refer to: p2295

p2297[0...n]

CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLimS_src


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1084[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller. Refer to: p2291 In order that the output of the technology controller does not exceed the maximum speed limit, its upper limit p2297 should be connected to the actual maximum speed r1084. In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must also be connected to the output of the ramp-function generator r1150.

p2298[0...n]

CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1087[0] Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller. Refer to: p2292 If the technology controller is rotated in a negative direction in mode p2251 = 0, its lower limit p2298 should be connected to the actual minimum speed r1087. In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must also be connected to the output of the ramp-function generator r1150.

p2299[0...n]

CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Note:

Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller. In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must be connected to the output of ramp-function generator r1150 so that the technology controller stops when the speed limits are reached (see also p2297, p2298).

p2302

Technology controller output signal starting value / Tec_ctr start val


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 200.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the start value for the output of the technology controller. If the drive is switched on and the technology controller is already enabled (see p2200, r0056.3), then it's output signal r2294 first goes to the start value p2302, before the controller starts to operate.

Dependency:

The starting value is only effective in the mode "technology controller as main speed setpoint" (p2251 = 0). If the technology controller is first enabled when the drive is switched on, a start speed remains ineffective, and the controller output starts with the actual setpoint speed of the ramp-function generator.

Note:

If the technology controller operates on the speed/setpoint channel (p2251 = 0), then the starting value is interpreted as the starting speed and when operation is enabled, is connected to the output of the technology controller (r2294).

1-302

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

If fault F07426 "technology controller actual value limited" occurs while ramping up to the starting value and if the associated reaction has been set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101), the starting value is kept as the speed setpoint instead of a switch to closed-loop control operation.

p2306

Technology controller fault signal inversion / Tec_ctrl fault inv


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Caution:

Setting to invert the fault signal of the technology controller. The setting depends on the type of control loop. 0: 1: No inversion Inversion

If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can become unstable and can oscillate!

Note:

The correct setting can be determined as follows: - inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0). - increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller). - if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out. - if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be set. If value = 0: The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor). If value = 1: The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).

r2344

CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) / Tec_ctrl n_setp_sm


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the smoothed speed setpoint of the technology controller prior to switching to operation with fault response (see p2345). Refer to: p2345 The smoothing time is 10 s.

p2345

Technology controller fault response / Tech_ctrl flt resp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the response of the technology controller to the occurrence of a fault F07426 (technology controller actual value limited). The fault response is executed if status bits 8 or 9 in technology controller status word r2349 are set. If both status bits are zero, a switch back to technology controller operation will follow. 0: 1: 2: Function inhibited On fault: Changeover to r2344 (or p2302) On fault: Changeover to p2215

Value:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-303

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency:

The parameterized fault response is only effective if the technology controller mode is set to p2251 = 0 (technology controller as main setpoint). Refer to: p2267, p2268, r2344 Refer to: F07426

Notice:

Dependent upon the application, the changing over of the setpoint when fault F07426 occurs can lead to the fault condition disappearing and the re-activation of the technology controller. This can repeat itself and cause limit oscillations. In this case a suitable fault response or a different fixed setpoint 15 for the fault response p2345 = 2 should be selected. The parameterized fault response can only be achieved if the default fault response of the technology controller fault F07426 is set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101). If a fault response other than "NONE" is entered in p2101 for F07426, p2345 must be set to zero. If the fault occurs during ramping up to the starting setpoint p2302, this starting setpoint is retained as the final value (there is no changeover to the fault response setpoint).

Note:

r2349.0...12

CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Technology controller de-activated Technology controller limited Technology controller, motorized potentiometer limited max. Technology controller, motorized potentiometer limited min. Technology controller speed setpoint total in setpoint channel Technology controller RFG bypassed in the setpoint channel Technology controller starting value at the current limit Technology controller actual value at the minimum Technology controller actual value at the maximum Technology controller output at the minimum Technology controller output at the maximum Fault response active 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No Yes No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word of the technology controller. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 09 10 11 12

p2900[0...n]

CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -10000.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets a fixed percentage. Refer to: p2901, p2930 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint)

1-304

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p2901[0...n]

CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -10000.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 10000.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets a fixed percentage. Refer to: p2900, p2930 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)

r2902[0...14]

CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max - [%] Factory setting - [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Signal sources for frequently used percentage values. [0] = Fixed value +0 % [1] = Fixed value +5 % [2] = Fixed value +10 % [3] = Fixed value +20 % [4] = Fixed value +50 % [5] = Fixed value +100 % [6] = Fixed value +150 % [7] = Fixed value +200 % [8] = Fixed value -5 % [9] = Fixed value -10 % [10] = Fixed value -20 % [11] = Fixed value -50 % [12] = Fixed value -100 % [13] = Fixed value -150 % [14] = Fixed value -200 % Refer to: p2900, p2901, p2930 The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings.

Dependency: Note:

p2930[0...n]

CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min -100000.00 [Nm] Calculated: Scaling: p2003 Unit selection: Max 100000.00 [Nm] Factory setting 0.00 [Nm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets a fixed value for torque. Refer to: p2900, p2901 A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-305

Parameters Parameter list

p3110

External fault 3, power-up delay / Ext fault 3 t_on


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000 [ms] Factory setting 0 [ms] Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Sets the delay time for external fault 3. Refer to: p2108, p3111, p3112 Refer to: F07862

p3111[0...n]

BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated

Dependency:

Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112 Refer to: F07862

p3112[0...n]

BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description:

Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated

Dependency:

Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111 Refer to: F07862

r3113.0...15

CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the status of NAMUR signal bit bar. The faults or alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message bit.

1-306

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Bit field:

Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 11 15

Signal name Fault drive converter data electronics / software error Network fault DC link overvoltage Fault drive converter power electronics Drive converter overtemperature Ground fault Motor overload Bus error External safety-relevant shutdown Error communication internal Fault infeed Other faults

1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No No

FP -

r3131

CO: Actual flt value / Actual flt value


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Integer32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault. Refer to: r2131, r3132

r3132

CO: Actual component number / Act comp_no.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Integer32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the component number of the oldest fault that is still active. Refer to: r2131, r3131

p3230[0...n]

CI: Load monitoring, speed actual value / Load monit n_act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: p2000 Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32 Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the load monitoring. Refer to: r2169, p2181, p2192, p2193, p3231 Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925 The parameter is only effective for p2193 = 2.

p3231[0...n]

Load monitoring speed deviation / Load monit n_dev


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: 3_1 Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: p0505 Max 210000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 150.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Dependency:

Sets the permissible speed deviation during load monitoring (for p2193 = 2). Refer to: r2169, p2181, p2193, p3230 Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-307

Parameters Parameter list

p3232[0...n]

BI: Load monitoring failure detection / Load_moni fail_det


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 1 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for detecting a failure. Refer to: p2192, p2193 Refer to: F07936 Monitoring is triggered with a 0 signal, as soon as the time in p2192 has expired.

p3233[0...n]

Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000000 [ms] Factory setting 100 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Sets the time constant for the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value. The smoothed torque actual value is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.

p3235

Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2000 [ms] Factory setting 320 [ms] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor. After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. For p3235 = 0 the function is deactivated. The monitoring is automatically de-activated during the flying restart operation for a motor that is still rotating. 3-phase phase failures cannot be detected and are indicated by other messages (e.g. F07902).

p3320[0...n]

Fluid flow machine power point 1 / Fluid_mach P1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 25.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 1 as a [%]. The characteristic comprises the following value pairs: Power (P) / speed (n) p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1) p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2) p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3) p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4) p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5)

Dependency:

Refer to: r0041, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329

1-308

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3321[0...n]

Fluid flow machine speed point 1 / Fluid_mach n1


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 0.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 1 as a [%]. The characteristic comprises the following value pairs: Power (P) / speed (n) p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1) p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2) p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3) p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4) p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5)

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

p3322[0...n]

Fluid flow machine power point 2 / Fluid_mach P2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 50.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 2 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

p3323[0...n]

Fluid flow machine speed point 2 / Fluid_mach n2


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 25.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 2 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-309

Parameters Parameter list

p3324[0...n]

Fluid flow machine power point 3 / Fluid_mach P3


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 77.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 3 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

p3325[0...n]

Fluid flow machine speed point 3 / Fluid_mach n3


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 50.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 3 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

p3326[0...n]

Fluid flow machine power point 4 / Fluid_mach P4


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 92.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 4 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3327, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

p3327[0...n]

Fluid flow machine speed point 4 / Fluid_mach n4


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 75.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 4 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3328, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

1-310

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p3328[0...n]

Fluid flow machine power point 5 / Fluid_mach P5


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 100.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 5 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3329 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

p3329[0...n]

Fluid flow machine speed point 5 / Fluid_mach n5


Access level: 2 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100.00 Factory setting 100.00 Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 5 as a [%]. Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328 The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041.

Dependency: Note:

p3330[0...n]

BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 / 2/3 wire cmd 1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for command 1 for the two-wire control/three-wire control. Refer to: p0015, p3331, p3332, r3333, p3334 The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.

p3331[0...n]

BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 / 2/3 wire cmd 2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for command 2 for the two-wire control/three-wire control. Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3332, r3333, p3334 The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-311

Parameters Parameter list

p3332[0...n]

BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 / 2/3 wire cmd 3


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: CDS, p0170

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source for command 3 for the two-wire control/three-wire control. Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3331, r3333, p3334 The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.

r3333.0...3

CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word / 2/3 wire STW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the control word for the two wire control/three wire control. The control signals are dependent on the wire control set in p0015 and the signal states at the digital inputs. Bit 00 01 02 03 Signal name ON Reversing ON/inverting Reversing/inverting 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 signal No No No No FP -

Dependency:

Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3331, p3332, p3334

p3334

2/3 wire control selection / 2/3 wire select


Access level: 4 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4 No wire control Two wire control clockwise/counterclockwise 1 Two wire control clockwise/counterclockwise 2 Three wire control enable clockwise/counterclockwise Three wire control enable ON/reversing Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Sets the two wire control/three wire control. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0015, p3330, p3331, p3332, r3333 This value depends on the wire control set in p0015.

p3856[0...n]
PM240

Compound braking current / Compound I_brake


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0.00 [%] Calculated: Scaling: PERCENT Unit selection: Max 250.00 [%] Factory setting 0.00 [%] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description:

Compound braking current is used to define the amount of DC current that is produced on stopping the motor during U/f operation to further increase the DC brake function. Compound braking is a superimposition of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (net braking along the ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This permits braking with controlled motor frequency and minimum power input into the motor. Effective braking without using additional hardware components is obtained by optimizing the ramp down time and compound braking.

1-312

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency:

The compound braking current is only activated if the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold value in r1282. Compound braking does not operate: - when DC braking is active (refer to p1230, r1239) - as long as the motor is not magnetized (e.g. for flying restart) - for vector control (p1300 >= 20) - for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx)

Caution:

Generally, increasing the braking current improves the braking effect when stopping the motor. However, if the value is set too high, then the drive can be tripped (shut down) as a result of overcurrent or ground fault. Recommendation: p3856 < 100 % x (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2 Compound braking generates a current in the motor with a ripple manifesting the rotational frequency. The higher the braking current is set, the higher the resulting ripple, especially when the Vdc(max) control is simultaneously active (refer to to p1280).

Note:

The parameter value is entered relative to the rated motor current (p0305). Compound braking is deactivated with p3856 = 0%.

r3859.0
PM240

CO/BO: Compound braking status word / Compound Br ZSW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Compound braking active 1 signal Yes Factory setting 0 signal No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field: Dependency:

Displays the status word of the compound braking. Bit 00

Refer to: p3856

p3900

Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm


Access level: 1 Can be changed: C(1) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets that depend on the entries made during quick commissioning. p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning. The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p15 and p1500 are re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are calculated (corresponding to p0340 = 1). p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p15 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1. p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters corresponding to p0340 = 1.

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3:

No quick parameterization Quick parameterization after parameter reset Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)

Notice: Note:

After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0. When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0. When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-313

Parameters Parameter list

If a catalog motor has not been selected (see p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time: induction motor: p0320, p0352, p0362 ... p0369, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628 synchronous motor: p0326, p0327, p0352, p0604, p0605

r3925[0...n]

Identification final display / Ident final_disp


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) Motor data identification carried out at standstill (p1910 = 1) Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 = 1, 2) Motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters changed 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Changed Factory setting 0 signal No No No Not changed FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out. Bit 00 02 03 15

Note:

The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed. When motor rating plate parameters are changed, the final display is reset. When setting the individual bits, all of the most significant bits are reset.

r3926[0...n]

Voltage generation alternating base voltage amplitude / U_gen altern base


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [V] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [V] Factory setting - [V] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: MDS

Description:

Displays the base voltage for the alternating voltage in the context of motor data identification. 0: No alternating voltages. The function is de-activated. <0: Automatic determination of the base voltage and wobbulation / self-setting based on the converter and the connected motor. Otherwise: Base voltage for alternating current generation in volts (wobbulation active).

r3927[0...n]

Motor data identification control word / MotID STW


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Stator inductance estimate no measurement Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Leakage inductance estimate no measurement 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out. Bit 00 02 03

1-314

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

05 06 07 11 12 14 15 16 Dependency: Note:

Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Activate vibration damping De-activate vibration detection De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld De-activate rotor resistance Rr measurement De-activate valve interlocking time measurement Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead time Short motor identification (lower quality)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No

Refer to: r3925 The parameter is a copy of p1909.

r3928[0...n]

Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Saturation characteristic identification Moment of inertia identification Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Speed controller optimization (vibration test) q leakage inductance ident. (for current controller adaptation) Measurement shortened 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out. Bit 01 02 03 04 05 12

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: r3925 The parameter is a copy of p1959.

r3929[0...n]

Motor data identification modulated voltage generation / MotID U_gen mod


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: p0340 = 1 Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Wobble U_generate to determine dead-time correction Wobble U_generate to determine stator resistance Wobble U_generation to determine rotor time constant Wobble U_generation to determine leakage inductance Wobble U_generation to determine dynamic leakage inductance Wobble U_generation to determine magnetizing inductance Alternating U_generate to determine deadtime correction 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No No No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: DDS, p0180

Description: Bit field:

Configuration of voltage generation for the various MotID sections in the case of the most recent successful MotID. Bit 00 01 02 03 04 05 08

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-315

Parameters Parameter list

09 10 11 12 13

Alternating U_generate to determine stator resistance Alternating U_generate to determine rotor time constant Alternating U_generate to determine leakage inductance Alternating U_generate to determine dyn. leakage inductance Alternating U_generate to determine magnetizing inductance

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

r3930[0...4]

Power unit EEPROM characteristics / PU characteristics


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the characteristics (A5E number and versions) of the power unit. [0]: A5E number xxxx (A5Exxxxyyyy) [1]: A5E number yyyy (A5Exxxxyyyy) [2]: File version (logistic) [3]: File version (fixed data) [4]: File version (calib data)

p3950

Service parameter / Serv. par.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C, U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

For service personnel only.

r3960[0...1]
CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Control Unit temperature measured / CU temp measured


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: p2006 Unit selection: Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Min - [C] Description: Index: Dependency: Note:

Max - [C]

Factory setting - [C]

Displays the measured Control Unit temperature. An appropriate message is output when 87 C is exceeded. [0] = Actual measured value [1] = Maximum measured value Refer to: A01009 The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal. Re r3960[0]: Displays the currently measured Control Unit temperature. Re r3960[1]: Displays the highest measured Control Unit temperature. This value is saved on the module in a non-volatile fashion.

1-316

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r3974

Drive unit status word / Drv_unit ZSW


Access level: 1 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Software reset active Writing of parameters disabled as parameter save in progress Writing of parameters disabled as macro is running 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status word for the drive unit. Bit 00 01 02

r3978

BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device. The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.

p3981

Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Notice: Note:

Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object. Safety messages cannot be acknowledged using this parameter. Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge. After acknowledgement, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.

p3985

Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Change master control for STW1.0 = 0 Change master control in operation Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Danger:

Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode. 0: 1:

When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate up to another setpoint.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-317

Parameters Parameter list

r3986

Parameter count / Parameter No.


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit. The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters. Refer to: r0980, r0981, r0989

r3988[0...1]

Boot state / Boot_state


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 800 Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Index 0: Displays the boot state. Index 1: Displays the partial boot state

Value:

0: 1: 10: 20: 30: 40: 50: 90: 100: 101: 110: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115: 117: 150: 160: 170: 180: 200: 210: 250: 325: 350: 360: 370: 380: 550: 625: 650: 660: 670: 680: 690: 700:

Not active Fatal fault Fault Reset all parameters Drive object modified Download using commissioning software Parameter download using commissioning software Reset Control Unit Start initialization Only for internal Siemens use Instantiate Control Unit basis Insert drive object Only for internal Siemens use Only for internal Siemens use Only for internal Siemens use Parameter download using commissioning software Only for internal Siemens use Wait until Power Module is determined Evaluate Power Module Instantiate Control Unit reset Only for internal Siemens use First commissioning Create drive packages Wait for fault acknowledge Wait for input of drive type Determine drive type Only for internal Siemens use Wait until p0010 is set to 0 Only for internal Siemens use Call conversion functions for parameter Wait for non-cyclic start Start cyclic operation Evaluate drive commissioning status Only for internal Siemens use Only for internal Siemens use Wait for non-cyclic start Save parameters

1-318

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

725: 740: 745: 750: 800: Index:

Wait for cyclic Check the ability to operate Start cyclic calculations Interrupt enable Initialization finished

[0] = System [1] = Partial boot

r3996[0...1]

Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited. r3996[0] = 0: Parameter write not inhibited. 0 < r3996[0] < 100: Parameter write inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing.

Index: Note:

[0] = Progress calculations [1] = Cause Re index 1: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

r5600
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Pe energy saving mode ID / Pe mode ID


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 POWER OFF En-saving mode 2 Ready Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Displays the PROFIenergy mode ID of the effective energy saving mode. 0: 2: 255:

Note:

Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5602[0...1]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Pe energy-saving mode pause time minimal / Pe mod t_pause min


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 300000 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting [0] 300000 [ms] [1] 480000 [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the minimum possible pause time for the energy-saving mode. The value is the sum of the following times: - Energy-saving mode transition time - Operating state transition time - Energy-saving mode, dwell time minimal

Index: Note:

[0] = Reserved [1] = Mode 2 It is not permissible that the value is less than the sum of the "energy-saving mode transition time" and the "operating state transition time" (system properties). Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-319

Parameters Parameter list

p5606[0...1]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Pe energy-saving mode dwell time maximum / Pe t_dwell max


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 0 [ms] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 4294967295 [ms] Factory setting 4294967295 [ms] Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Note:

Sets the maximum dwell time for the energy-saving mode. [0] = Reserved [1] = Mode 2 Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5611
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Pe energy-saving properties general / Pe properties gen


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Inhibit PROFIenergy Drive initiates OFF1 Trans into energy-saving mode from PROFIdrive state S4 poss 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0000 bin 0 signal No No No FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Sets the general properties for energy-saving. Bit 00 01 02

Note:

Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

p5612[0...1]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

Pe energy-saving properties mode-dependent / Pe properties mod


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting [0] 0110 bin [1] 0000 bin Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index: Bit field: Note:

Sets the mode-dependent properties for energy-saving. [0] = Reserved [1] = Mode 2 Bit 00 Signal name Reserved 1 signal Yes 0 signal No FP -

Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

r5613.0...1
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive / Pe save act/inact


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Pe active Pe inactive 1 signal Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No FP Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Display and binector output for the state display PROFIenergy energy saving active or inactive. Bit 00 01

Note:

Bit 0 and bit 1 are inverse of one another. Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

1-320

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p5614
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

BI: Pe set switch-on inhibit signal source / Pe sw on_inh s_src


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0 Data type: U32 / Binary Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the signal source to set in the PROFIdrive state S1 "switching-on inhibit". Refer to: r5613 Pe: PROFIenergy profiles

r7758[0...19]

KHP Control Unit serial number / KHP CU ser_no


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the actual serial number of the Control Unit. The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices. For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. KHP: Know-How Protection

p7759[0...19]

KHP Control Unit reference serial number / KHP CU ref ser_no


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference serial number for the Control Unit. Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again adapt the project to the modified hardware.

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 KHP: Know-How Protection - The OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data". - SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory card copy protection have been activated.

r7760

Write protection/know-how protection status / Wr_prot/KHP stat


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name Write protection active Know-how protection active Know-how protection temporarily withdrawn 1 signal Yes Yes Yes Factory setting 0 signal No No No FP Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Displays the status for the write protection and know-how protection. Bit 00 01 02

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-321

Parameters Parameter list

03 04 Dependency: Notice: Note:

Know-how protection cannot be deactivated Yes Memory card copy protection active Yes

No No

Refer to: p7761, p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 For bits 01 ... 04, the following applies: For SIMOTION D410-2 these bits have no significance (they are always 0). KHP: Know-How Protection Re bit 00: Write protection can be activated/deactivated via p7761 on the Control Unit. Re bit 01: The know-how protection can be activated by entering a password (p7766 ... p7768). Re bit 02: If it has already been activated, know-how protection can be temporarily deactivated by entering the valid password in p7766. In this case, bit 1 = 0 and bit 2 = 1 offset. Re bit 03: Know-how protection cannot be deactivated, as p7766 is not entered in the OEM exception list (only the factory setting is possible). This bit is only set if know-how protection is active (bit 1 = 1) and p7766 has not been entered in the OEM exception list. Re bit 04: When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be additionally protected against being used with other memory cards. This bit is only set if know-how protection is active and p7765 = 1.

p7761

Write protection / Write protection


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Deactivate write protection Activate write protection Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency: Note:

Setting for activating/de-activating the write protection for adjustable parameters. 0: 1:

Refer to: r7760 The following parameters are excluded from the write protection: p0003, p0971, p3950, p3981, p7761, p9400

p7762

Write protection multi-master fieldbus system access behavior / Fieldbus acc_behav


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Write access independent of p7761 Write access dependent on p7761 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency:

Sets the behavior for write protection when accessing via multi-master fieldbus systems (e.g. CAN, BACnet). 0: 1:

Refer to: r7760, p7761

1-322

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p7763

KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7764
Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 500 Factory setting 1 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the number of parameters for the OEM exception list (p7764[0...n]). p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1 Refer to: p7764 For SIMOTION D410-2, this parameter has no significance. KHP: Know-How Protection Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to.

p7764[0...n]

KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 65535 Factory setting [0] 7766 [1...499] 0 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: p7763

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

OEM exception list (p7764[0...n] for setting parameters that should be excluded from know-how protection. p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1 The number of indices depends on p7763. Refer to: p7763 For SIMOTION D410-2, this parameter has no significance. KHP: Know-How Protection Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to.

p7765

KHP memory card copy protection / KHP copy protect


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Setting for activating/de-activating copy protection for the memory card. This means that the OEM can define whether the parameters and DCC data encrypted on the memory card should be protected before using on other memory cards.

Value: Dependency: Note:

0: 1:

Deactivating protection Activating protection

Refer to: p7766, p7767, p7768 KHP: Know-How Protection The memory card copy protection is only effective when the know-how protection has been activated.

p7766[0...29]

KHP password input / KHP passw input


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the password for know-how protection.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-323

Parameters Parameter list

Example of a password: 123aBc = 49 50 51 97 66 99 dec (ASCII characters) [0] = character 1 (e.g. 49 dec) [1] = character 2 (e.g. 50 dec) ... [5] = character 6 (e.g. 99 dec) [29] = 0 dec (completes the entry) Dependency: Notice: Note: Refer to: p7767, p7768 An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. When using the STARTER commissioning software, the password should be entered using the associated dialogs. KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7766[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed. When using the STARTER commissioning software, when reading via the expert list, p7766[0...29] is displayed with "********". The following rules apply when entering the password: - Password entry must start with p7766[0]. - No gaps are permissible in the password. - Entering a password is completed when writing to p7766[29] (p7766[29] = 0 for passwords less than 30 characters).

p7767[0...29]

KHP password new / KHP passw new


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Sets the new password for know-how protection. Refer to: p7766, p7768 KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7767[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.

p7768[0...29]

KHP password confirmation / KHP passw confirm


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Confirms the new password for know-how protection. Refer to: p7766, p7767 KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7768[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.

p7769[0...20]

KHP memory card reference serial number / KHP mem ref ser_no
Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the reference serial number for the memory card. Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again adapt the project to the modified hardware.

Dependency:

Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768

1-324

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Note:

KHP: Know-How Protection - The OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data". - SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory card copy protection have been activated.

p7775

NVRAM data backup/import/delete / NVRAM backup


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 17 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Setting to backup/import/delete NVRAM data. NVRAM data are non-volatile data in the device (e.g. fault buffer). For NVRAM data actions, the following data are excluded: - Crash diagnostics - CU operating hours counter - CU temperature - Safety logbook

Value:

0: 1: 2: 3: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17:

Inactive NVRAM data backup to memory card Import NVRAM data from the memory card Delete NVRAM data in the device Error when clearing Error when backing up, memory card not available Error when backing up, insufficient memory space Error when backing up Error when importing, memory card not available Error when importing, checksum error Error when importing, no NVRAM data available Error when importing

Notice: Note:

Re value = 2, 3: These actions are only possible when pulses are inhibited. After the action has been successfully completed, the parameter is automatically set to zero. The actions importing and deleting NVRAM data immediately initiate a warm restart. If the procedure was not successfully completed, then an appropriate fault value is displayed (p7775 >= 10).

r7841[0...15]

Power Module serial number / PM serial no.


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Notice:

Displays the actual serial number of the Power Module. The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices. An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-325

Parameters Parameter list

r7843[0...20]

Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no


Access level: 1 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Notice: Note:

Displays the actual serial number of the memory card. The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices. An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card: r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1 r7843[1] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 2 r7843[2] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 3 r7843[3] = 57 dec --> ASCII characters = "9" --> serial number, character 4 r7843[4] = 50 dec --> ASCII characters = "2" --> serial number, character 5 r7843[5] = 51 dec --> ASCII characters = "3" --> serial number, character 6 r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7 r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8 ... r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20 r7843[20] = 0 dec Serial number = 111923E

r7901[0...43]

Sampling times / t_sample


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min - [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max - [s] Factory setting - [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit. For r7901[x] = 0, the following applies: The time slice is not active.

r7903

Hardware sampling times still assignable / HW t_samp free


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned. These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC (Drive Control Chart) or FBLOCKS (free function blocks).

Note:

OA: Open Architecture

r8570[0...39]

Macro drive object / Macro DO


Access level: 1 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory.

1-326

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Dependency: Note:

Refer to: p0015 For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8571[0...39]

Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory. For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8572[0...39]

Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory. Refer to: p1000 For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8573[0...39]

Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Note:

Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory. Refer to: p1500 For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

r8585

Macro execution actual / Macro executed


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Dependency:

Displays the macro currently being executed on the drive object. Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573

r8854
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFINET state / PN state


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 No initialization Fatal fault Initialization Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

State display for PROFINET. 0: 1: 2:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-327

Parameters Parameter list

3: 4: 5: 6: 255:

Send configuration Receive configuration Non-cyclic communication Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle) Cyclic communication

r8854
PROFINET CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F

PROFINET state / PN state


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Min 0 Description: Value: State display for PROFINET. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 255:

Max 255 No initialization Fatal fault Initialization Send configuration Receive configuration Non-cyclic communication Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle) Cyclic communication

Factory setting -

r8858[0...39]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFINET read diagnostics channel / PN diag_chan read


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the PROFINET diagnostics data. Only for internal Siemens diagnostics.

r8858[0...39]
PROFINET CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F

PROFINET read diagnostics channel / PN diag_chan read


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Min Description: Note: Only for internal Siemens diagnostics.

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the PROFINET diagnostics data.

1-328

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r8859[0...7]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PROFINET identification data / PN ident_data


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the PROFINET identification data [0] = Version interface structure [1] = Version interface driver [2] = Company (Siemens = 42) [3] = CB type [4] = Firmware version [5] = Firmware date (year) [6] = Firmware date (day/month) [7] = Firmware patch/hot fix Example: r8859[0] = 100 --> version of the interface structure V1.00 r8859[1] = 111 --> version of the interface driver V1.11 r8859[2] = 42 --> SIEMENS r8859[3] = 0 r8859[4] = 1300 --> first part, firmware version V13.00 (second part, see index 7) r8859[5] = 2011 --> year 2011 r8859[6] = 2306 --> 23rd June r8859[7] = 1700 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V13.00.17.00)

Note:

r8859[0...7]
PROFINET CU240B-2 CU240B-2_DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2_DP CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F

PROFINET identification data / PN ident_data


Access level: 4 Can be changed: Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Min Description: Index: [0] = Version interface structure [1] = Version interface driver [2] = Company (Siemens = 42) [3] = CB type [4] = Firmware version [5] = Firmware date (year) [6] = Firmware date (day/month) [7] = Firmware patch/hot fix Example:

Max -

Factory setting -

Displays the PROFINET identification data

Note:

r8859[0] = 100 --> version of the interface structure V1.00 r8859[1] = 111 --> version of the interface driver V1.11 r8859[2] = 42 --> SIEMENS r8859[3] = 0 r8859[4] = 1300 --> first part, firmware version V13.00 (second part, see index 7) r8859[5] = 2011 --> year 2011 r8859[6] = 2306 --> 23rd June r8859[7] = 1700 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V13.00.17.00)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-329

Parameters Parameter list

r8909
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN device ID / PN device ID
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the PROFINET Device ID. Every SINAMICS device type has its own PROFINET Device ID and its own PROFINET GSD. List of the SINAMICS Device IDs: 0501 hex: S120/S150 0504 hex: G130/G150 0505 hex: GM150 0509 hex: GL150 050A hex: DC MASTER 050B hex: SL150 050C hex: SM120 050E hex: S110 050F hex: G120P 0510 hex: G120C 0511 hex: G120 0512 hex: G120D

p8920[0...239]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN Name of Station / PN Name Stat


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active station name is displayed in r8930. An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. PN: PROFINET

p8921[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN IP address of station / PN IP of stat


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active IP address is displayed in r8931. The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

1-330

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p8922[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN Default Gateway of Station / PN Def Gateway


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active default gateway is displayed in r8932. The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8923[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN Subnet Mask of Station / PN Subnet Mask


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting 0 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Sets the subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The active subnet mask is displayed in r8933. The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925 = 1. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8925
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN interface configuration / PN IF config


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Setting to activate the interface configuration for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. p8925 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation. 0: 1: 2: 3: No function Activate configuration Activate and save configuration Delete configuration

Note:

Re p8925 = 1: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated. Re p8925 = 2: The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated and saved to non-volatile memory. Re p8925 = 3: Restores all memory locations for the interface configuration to the factory settings. The factory settings for the interface configuration are loaded on activation (p8925 = 1) or at the next POWER ON.

p8929
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN remote controller number / PN rem ctrl num


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the number of remote controllers expected for PROFINET onboard. The "Shared Device" functionality is activated with a value = 2.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-331

Parameters Parameter list

The drive is being accessed by two PROFINET controllers simultaneously: - automation controller (SIMOTION or SIMATIC A-CPU). - safety controller (SIMATIC F-CPU). Value: Notice: Note: 1: 2: Automation or Safety Automation and Safety

The F CPU may only use PROFIsafe telegrams. A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or download.

r8930[0...239]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN Name of Station active / PN Name Stat act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the active station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8931[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN IP Address of Station active / PN IP of Stat act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the active IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8932[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN Default Gateway of Station active / PN Def Gateway act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the active default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8933[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN Subnet Mask of Station active / PN Subnet Mask act


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the active subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

r8935[0...5]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN MAC Address of Station / PN MAC of Station


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the MAC address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.

1-332

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

r8939
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN DAP ID / PN DAP ID
Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Note:

Displays the PROFINET Device Access Point ID (DAP ID) for the onboard PROFINET interface. The combination of device ID (r8909) and DAP ID uniquely identifies a PROFINET access point. List of the SINAMICS DAP IDs: 20005 hex: CBE20 V4.3 20006 hex: CBE20 V4.4 20007 hex: CBE20 V4.5 20106 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.4 20107 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.5 20206 hex: CU305 PN V4.4 20306 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.4 20307 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.5 20407 hex: CU230-2 PN /CU240-2PN 20507 hex: CU250-2 PN

r8960[0...2]

PN subslot controller assignment / PN subslot assign


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 8 Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Displays the controller assignment of a PROFINET subslot on the actual drive object. [0] = Subslot 2 PROFIsafe [1] = Subslot 3 PZD telegram [2] = Subslot 4 PZD supplementary data Refer to: r8961, r8962 Example: If the parameter contains the value 2 in index [1], then this means that subslot 3 is assigned to controller 2.

Dependency: Note:

r8961[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN IP Address Remote Controller 1 / IP Addr Rem Ctrl1


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the IP address of the first PROFINET controller connected with the device via PN onboard.

r8962[0...3]
CU240E-2_PN_F CU240E-2 PN

PN IP Address Remote Controller 2 / IP Addr Rem Ctrl2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 255 Factory setting Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the IP address of the second PROFINET controller connected with the device via PN onboard.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-333

Parameters Parameter list

p8991

USB memory access / USB mem acc


Access level: 3 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2 Memory card Flash r/w internal Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Note:

Selects the storage medium for access via the USB mass storage. 1: 2:

A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p8999

USB functionality / USB functionality


Access level: 4 Can be changed: T Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 USS commissioning via the virtual COM port Only memory access USB commissioning and memory access Factory setting 3 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value:

Selecting the USB functionality. 1: 2: 3:

Note:

COMM: Commissioning. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

p9301
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 2) / SI Mtn enable P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field:

Max -

Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 1 signal Enable Enable Enable Enable 0 signal Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit Inhibit FP 2860 2861 -

Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring. Bit 00 16 17 30 Signal name Enable SI Motion Enable SSM hysteresis and filtering Enable SDI Enable F-DI in PROFIsafe telegram 900

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p9501 Refer to: F01682, F01683 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

1-334

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p9301
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2_F

SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 2) / SI Mtn enable P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 1 signal Enable Enable 0 signal Inhibit Inhibit FP 2861 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring. Bit 00 17 Signal name Enable SI Motion Enable SDI

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p9501 Refer to: F01682, F01683 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SLS: Safely-Limited Speed SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9306
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion function specification (processor 2) / SI Mtn fct spec P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3 Safety without encoder and braking ramp(SBR) Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring(SAM) / delay time Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring. 1: 3:

Refer to: C30711 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

p9307
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion function configuration (processor 2) / SI Mtn config P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 01

Max Signal name Extended message acknowledgement Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F 1 signal Yes No

Factory setting 0011 bin 0 signal No Yes FP -

Sets the function configuration for safe motion monitoring.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: C01711 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Re bit 00: When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgement (internal event acknowledge) can be performed by selecting/deselecting STO.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-335

Parameters Parameter list

Re bit 01: When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active.

p9309
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 2) / SI Mtn behav IL P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Min Description: Bit field: Bit 00 08 Dependency: Notice:

Max Signal name SSM during pulse suppression and sensorless SDI during pulse suppression and sensorless 1 signal Becomes inactive Becomes inactive

Factory setting 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin 0 signal Remains active Remains active FP -

Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation.

Refer to: C01711 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Re bit 00: If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1, because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case, the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be increased.

Note:

SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) Re bit 00: For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level. For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept and the system goes into the STO state. Re bit 08: For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive. For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO state.

p9309
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2_F

SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 2) / SI Mtn behav IL P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max Signal name SDI during pulse suppression and sensorless 1 signal Becomes inactive Factory setting 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin 0 signal Remains active FP Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Bit field:

Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation. Bit 08

Dependency:

Refer to: C01711

1-336

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Notice:

This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Re bit 00: If the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time is too low, or there is an insufficient clearance between the SSM limit speed, and the shutdown speed, then it is possible that the "speed under limit value" signal does not change to 1, because no speed actual value below the SSM limit was able to be identified before pulse cancellation. In this case, the OFF1 or the OFF3 ramp-down time or the clearance between the SSM limit speed and shutdown speed must be increased.

Note:

SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) Re bit 00: For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level. For bit = 0 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is kept and the system goes into the STO state. Re bit 08: For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive. For bit = 0 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies: - Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the STO state.

p9321[0...7]
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion gearbox motor/load denominator (processor 2) / SI Mtn gear den P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2147000000 Factory setting 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the motor and the load. [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Refer to: p9322 It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active.

Dependency: Notice:

p9322[0...7]
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion gearbox motor/load numerator (processor 2) / SI Mtn gear num P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 1 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 2147000000 Factory setting 1 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the motor and the load. [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Refer to: p9321

Dependency:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-337

Parameters Parameter list

Notice: Note:

It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active. In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the gearbox ratio. Example: Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2 --> p9321 = 1, p9322 = 8 (4 x 2)

p9331[0...3]
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SLS limit values (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS lim P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.01 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 2000.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Index:

Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Refer to: p9363, p9531 Refer to: C01714 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SLS: Safely-Limited Speed

Dependency: Notice: Note:

p9342
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion act. val. comparison tolerance (crossw.) (processor 2) / SI Mtn actV tol P2
Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.0010 [] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 360.0000 [] Factory setting 12.0000 [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between processors 1 and 2. Refer to: p9542 Refer to: C01711 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm. For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and standard setting of p9320, p9321 and p9322, the standard setting of p9342 corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 on the motor side.

p9345
PM240 PM250 PM260 CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SSM filter time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM filt P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Min 0.00 [s] Description: Notice: Note:

Max 100000.00 [s]

Factory setting 0.00 [s]

Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill. This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

1-338

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

p9346
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SSM velocity limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM v_limP2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 20.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Caution:

Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set. Refer to: p9546 The following applies for p9306 = 3: The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot.

Notice: Note:

This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9347
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.0010 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 500.0000 [rpm] Factory setting 10.0000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx). Refer to: C01711 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

p9348
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (processor 2) / SI mtn SAM tol P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 120000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 300.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function. Refer to: p9548 Refer to: C01706 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-339

Parameters Parameter list

p9351
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS t P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover for the function "safely limited speed" (SLS). When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage, within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active. Even if SLS is activated from the state "SLS in active", then this delay is still applied.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p9551 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SLS: Safely-Limited Speed

p9356
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn IL t_del P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 3600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 600000000.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B / SS1. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions with safe brake ramp monitoring (p9306 = 1) and the OFF3 ramp enabled at the same time (p9507.3 = 0), the parameter has no effect.

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Refer to: p9360, p9556 Refer to: C01701 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SS1: Safe Stop 1

p9358
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc t P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 5000000.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 100000000.00 [s] Factory setting 40000000.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode. If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated. Refer to: p9558 Refer to: C01799 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

p9360
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (processor 2) / SI Mtn IL n_sh P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 10.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 6000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 10.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression. Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A).

Dependency:

Refer to: p9356, p9560

1-340

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Notice: Note:

This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SS1: Safe Stop 1

p9363[0...3]
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SLS stop response (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS stop P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 0 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Index:

Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS). These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS. 0: 1: STOP A STOP B

[0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLP4 Refer to: p9331, p9563 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SLS: Safely-Limited Speed

Dependency: Notice: Note:

p9364
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SDI tolerance (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI tol P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.001 [] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 360.000 [] Factory setting 12.000 [] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice: Note:

Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C30716 is initiated. Refer to: p9365, p9366 Refer to: C30716 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9365
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SDI delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI t P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.00 [s] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 600000000.00 [s] Factory setting 100000.00 [s] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). When selecting the SDI function, motion in the monitored direction is permissible as a maximum for this time; this means that this time can be used for braking existing motion. Refer to: p9364, p9366 Refer to: C30716 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

Dependency: Notice: Note:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

1-341

Parameters Parameter list

p9366
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SDI stop response (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI Stop P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0 Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1 Factory setting 1 Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This setting applies to both directions of motion. In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted.

Value: Dependency: Note:

0: 1:

STOP A STOP B

Refer to: p9364, p9365 Refer to: C30716 SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)

p9368
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion SAM velocity limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn SAM v_limP2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 0.00 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 1000.00 [rpm] Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Notice: Note:

Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function. SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot. This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies: The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM.

p9370
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion acceptance test mode (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc_mod P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: U, T Units group: Min 0000 hex Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 00AC hex Factory setting 0000 hex Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description: Value: Dependency: Note:

Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode. 0: 172: [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode

Refer to: p9358, r9371 Refer to: C01799 Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the motion monitoring functions, which are integrated in the drives, are enabled (p9601.2/p9801.2).

r9371
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion acceptance test status (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc_stat P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: Units group: Min 0000 hex Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 00AC hex Factory setting Data type: Integer16 Data set: -

Description:

Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.

1-342

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved SINAMICS G120 CU240B/E-2 Control Units List Manual (LH11), 01/2012

Parameters Parameter list

Value:

0: 12: 13: 15: 172:

[00 hex] Acc_mode inactive [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9370 [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer [AC hex] Acc_mode active

Dependency:

Refer to: p9358, p9370 Refer to: C01799

p9381
CU240E-2_DP_F CU240E-2_F CU240E-2_PN_F

SI Motion brake ramp reference value (processor 2) / SI Mtn ramp ref P2


Access level: 3 Can be changed: C(95) Units group: Min 600.0000 [rpm] Calculated: Scaling: Unit selection: Max 240000.0000 [rpm] Factory setting 1500.0000 [rpm] Data type: FloatingPoint32 Data set: -

Description: Dependency: Notice:

Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time). Refer to: p9382, p9383 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.

p9382<